Anda di halaman 1dari 230

SmartPlant Layout

User's Guide

Version 2011 R1 (9.1)

May 2012

DSP3D-PE-200052G
Copyright
Copyright © 2001-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2010. All Rights Reserved.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation
Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars
Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and
HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark,
and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
ComponentOne LLC 1991-2009, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of
Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma
company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Documentation Comments ................................................................................................................... 11

What's New in SmartPlant Layout ........................................................................................................... 12

SmartPlant Layout ..................................................................................................................................... 15

Understanding SmartPlant Layout .......................................................................................................... 17


SmartPlant Layout Common Tasks ...................................................................................................... 18
Selecting Objects .................................................................................................................................. 20

Auto-Route ................................................................................................................................................. 21
Automatically Route Command ............................................................................................................ 22
Auto-Router Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 22
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) ...................................................................................... 22
Reference Data Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 29
Results Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) ........................................................................................... 30
Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) .......................................................................................... 32
Settings Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) .......................................................................................... 33
Define Run Connections Command ..................................................................................................... 34
Define Run Connections Ribbon .................................................................................................... 34
Define a New Run and Its Connections ......................................................................................... 35
Define Run Connections for an Existing Run ................................................................................. 36
Limit Path Command ............................................................................................................................ 37
Limit Path Ribbon ........................................................................................................................... 37
Limit Path Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 37
Add Volume to Path Limit ............................................................................................................... 38
Reordering Volumes in a Path ....................................................................................................... 38
Remove Volume from Path Limit .................................................................................................... 38

Place Equipment ........................................................................................................................................ 39


Place equipment from the catalog ........................................................................................................ 42
Set positioning relationships for equipment .......................................................................................... 42
Place doors from the catalog ................................................................................................................ 43
Place windows from the catalog ........................................................................................................... 43
Edit equipment properties ..................................................................................................................... 44
Edit equipment relationships ................................................................................................................. 44
Equipment Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 45
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 45
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 49
Insulation Tab ................................................................................................................................. 50

Place Designed Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 51


Place designed equipment.................................................................................................................... 54
Set positioning relationships for designed equipment .......................................................................... 54
Edit designed equipment properties ..................................................................................................... 55

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 3


Contents

Edit designed equipment reference coordinate system ........................................................................ 55


Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 56
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 56
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 60
Insulation Tab ................................................................................................................................. 61

Place Shape ............................................................................................................................................... 63


Place a shape ....................................................................................................................................... 65
Edit shape properties ............................................................................................................................ 65
Edit prismatic shape properties ............................................................................................................. 66
Shape Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 67
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 67
Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 67
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 68
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 68

Creating Customized Shapes ................................................................................................................... 71


Place Prismatic Shape Ribbon ............................................................................................................. 72
Create Path Ribbon .............................................................................................................................. 73
Edit Path Straight Segment Ribbon ...................................................................................................... 74
Edit Path Arc Ribbon ............................................................................................................................. 75
Edit Path Turn Ribbon ........................................................................................................................... 76
Place a prismatic shape ........................................................................................................................ 78
Define the path for a prismatic shape ................................................................................................... 78
Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic shape .................................................................................... 79
Define cross-sectional properties for a prismatic shape ....................................................................... 80
Modify a sketched cross-section ........................................................................................................... 81
Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic shape .............................................................................. 82
Add segments to a path ........................................................................................................................ 83
Move Segments of a Path ..................................................................................................................... 83
Modify a straight segment in a path ...................................................................................................... 84
Modify an Arc in a Path ......................................................................................................................... 85
Modify a turn in a path .......................................................................................................................... 85
Sketch Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 86
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 86

Place Nozzle ............................................................................................................................................... 87


Place a nozzle ....................................................................................................................................... 88
Place a nozzle from a P&ID .................................................................................................................. 89
Place a foundation port ......................................................................................................................... 89
Nozzle Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 91
Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 91
Location Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 95
Foundation Port Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 96
Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port Properties) ............................................................................... 96
Location Tab (Foundation Port Properties) .................................................................................... 97
Holes Tab (Foundation Port Properties)......................................................................................... 98

Organizing Space Objects ...................................................................................................................... 101


Create Space Folder ........................................................................................................................... 103
Create Space Folder Ribbon ........................................................................................................ 104

4 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Contents

Select Space Folder Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 104


Create a space folder ................................................................................................................... 104

Create Space Objects.............................................................................................................................. 105


Place Volume by Two Points .............................................................................................................. 106
Place Volume by Two Points Ribbon ........................................................................................... 107
Select System Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 108
Place a volume by two points ....................................................................................................... 109
Place a volume by two points using PinPoint ............................................................................... 110
Place Volume by Four Points.............................................................................................................. 111
Place Volume by Four Points Ribbon........................................................................................... 112
Place a volume by four points ...................................................................................................... 112
Place Cylindrical Zone Command....................................................................................................... 113
Place Cylindrical Zone Ribbon ..................................................................................................... 114
Place a Cylindrical Zone ............................................................................................................... 114

Associating Volumes with Objects ........................................................................................................ 115


Associate Volume to Object ................................................................................................................ 115
Create a relationship between a volume and an object ............................................................... 116
Delete a relationship between a volume and an object ................................................................ 116
Edit Volume Ribbon ............................................................................................................................ 116
Modify the placement points of a volume ..................................................................................... 117
Modify the volume size by dragging ............................................................................................. 117
Move a volume to a new location ................................................................................................. 118
Convert a standard cross-section to a sketch .............................................................................. 118
Delete a space object ................................................................................................................... 119
Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 119
General Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 120
Shape Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 125
Cross-Section Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................... 126
Space Folder Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 127
General Tab (Space Folder Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 127
Edit volume properties .................................................................................................................. 127
Modify cross-sectional properties for a volume ............................................................................ 128
Permission Groups and Routing ......................................................................................................... 129
Create a Pipeline System ............................................................................................................. 131
Create a Piping System ................................................................................................................ 132

Route Pipe ................................................................................................................................................ 133


Create a new pipe run ......................................................................................................................... 144
Create an arc pipe run ........................................................................................................................ 145
Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run .............................................................................................. 145
Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors ..................................................................................... 146
Place components while routing pipes ............................................................................................... 147
Place splits while routing pipes ........................................................................................................... 147
Route a sloped pipe run ...................................................................................................................... 148
Route a multi-sloped pipe run ............................................................................................................. 148
Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location .............................................................................. 149
Route a pipe run at specified distance ................................................................................................ 149
Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction .......................................................................... 150
Route a pipe run with an offset ........................................................................................................... 150

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 5


Contents

Copy a pipe run ................................................................................................................................... 151


Extend an existing pipe run ................................................................................................................. 151
Extend an existing arc pipe ................................................................................................................. 151
Merge pipe runs .................................................................................................................................. 152
Choose a working plane ..................................................................................................................... 153
Select pipe run settings ....................................................................................................................... 153
Change the flow direction of a pipe run .............................................................................................. 154
New Pipe Run Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 154
Set Offset Reference Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 160
Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 161
Modify Slope Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 162
Select Pipe Run Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 162
Select System Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 163
Insulation Specification Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 163

Moving Pipe Features ............................................................................................................................. 165


Move a pipe run .................................................................................................................................. 168
Move a branch .................................................................................................................................... 168
Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet .................................................................................................. 169
Move a pipe end.................................................................................................................................. 169
Move a straight pipe ............................................................................................................................ 169
Move a turn ......................................................................................................................................... 170

Editing Properties .................................................................................................................................... 171


Edit pipeline properties ....................................................................................................................... 172
Edit pipe run properties ....................................................................................................................... 173
Edit branch properties ......................................................................................................................... 173
Edit straight pipe properties ................................................................................................................ 173
Edit turn feature properties ................................................................................................................. 173
Edit part properties .............................................................................................................................. 174

Deleting Features .................................................................................................................................... 175


Delete a branch ................................................................................................................................... 176
Delete a straight pipe .......................................................................................................................... 176
Delete a component ............................................................................................................................ 176
Delete a split ....................................................................................................................................... 176
Delete a turn........................................................................................................................................ 177
Delete a pipe run ................................................................................................................................. 177
Delete a pipeline ................................................................................................................................. 177

Insert Component .................................................................................................................................... 179


Insert a component ............................................................................................................................. 183
Insert a component while routing ........................................................................................................ 183
Insert an instrument ............................................................................................................................ 184
Insert a piping specialty item............................................................................................................... 184
Insert a surface mounted component ................................................................................................. 184
Insert the default branch ..................................................................................................................... 185
Insert the default reducer .................................................................................................................... 185
Insert the default turn .......................................................................................................................... 185
Place a tee from a P&ID ..................................................................................................................... 186
Place an elbolet................................................................................................................................... 186

6 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Contents

Select component settings .................................................................................................................. 186


Edit component properties .................................................................................................................. 187
Edit tap properties ............................................................................................................................... 187
Move a component ............................................................................................................................. 187
Rotate a component ............................................................................................................................ 188
Rotate a component on a nozzle ........................................................................................................ 188

Insert Split ................................................................................................................................................ 189


Insert a welded split ............................................................................................................................ 191
Insert a takedown joint ........................................................................................................................ 192
Insert a feature break .......................................................................................................................... 192
Edit split properties ............................................................................................................................. 192
Edit weld properties ............................................................................................................................ 192
Move a split ......................................................................................................................................... 193
Move a feature break .......................................................................................................................... 193

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................................... 195


Common Property Tabs ...................................................................................................................... 196
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 196
Connections Tab .......................................................................................................................... 197
Definition Tab ............................................................................................................................... 197
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 198
Occurrence Tab ............................................................................................................................ 199
Relationship Tab........................................................................................................................... 201
Connection Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 202
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 202
Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 202
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 203
General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 203
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 203
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 204
Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................ 204
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box) .................................................. 204
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 207
General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................. 207
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box..................................................................................................... 210
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 210
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 211
General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 211
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 216
General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................. 216
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 219
General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 219
Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 222
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 222
General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................. 222
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 225
General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 225
Spool Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 226
Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 226

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 7


Contents

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 227

8 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Preface
This document is a user's guide for the SmartPlant Layout task and provides command
reference information and procedural instructions.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 9


Preface

10 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Documentation Comments
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer
https://crmweb.intergraph.com.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 11


What's New in SmartPlant Layout

What's New in SmartPlant Layout


The following changes have been made to SmartPlant Layout.
Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1
 No changes were made in this version of the software.

12 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


What's New in SmartPlant Layout

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 13


SECTION 1

SmartPlant Layout
SmartPlant Layout is a route finding tool, not a pipe designer. The primary purpose of
SmartPlant Layout is to find the minimum installed cost route for the pipe. To do this a number
of candidate routes are generated for each routing requirement and the one with the lowest
"Evaluation Cost" is returned as the route solution.
SmartPlant Layout is also available as SmartMarine Layout and is fully compatible with
SmartMarine.
SmartPlant Layout has the following commands:
Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 19).
Automatically Route - Determines the best route for piping based on an economic
model. The primary use for this command is as a quick pipe run layout tool that you
can use to compare the costs of different plant layout configurations. For more
information, see Automatically Route Command (on page 22).
Define Run Connection - Creates or selects runs and defines the start and stop
connections for a run. For more information, see Define Run Connections Command
(on page 34).
Limit Path - Defines which volumes a run must route through. For more information,
see Limit Path Command (on page 36).
Place Equipment - Specifies a piece of equipment from the Equipment folder of the
catalog, and places an occurrence of it inside the model. For more information, see
Place Equipment (on page 39).
Place Designed Equipment - Places equipment types that have been defined in the
reference data. For more information, see Place Designed Equipment (on page 51).
Place Shape - Adds additional shapes or equipment objects to an existing designed
equipment type. For more information, see Place Shape (on page 63).
Place Nozzle - Adds different types of ports to a designed equipment object. For
more information, see Place Nozzle (on page 87).
Create New Space Folder - Creates a new hierarchical node for the organization of
space objects. For more information, see Create Space Folder (on page 103).
Place Space by Two Points - Defines a volume by selecting two points to represent
opposite vertices of the volume that you need. For more information, see Place
Volume by Two Points (on page 106).
Place Space by Four Points - Defines a space by entering three points to define a
base plane and a fourth point to define elevation or depth. For more information, see
Place Volume by Four Points (on page 111).
Place Cylindrical Zone - Defines a cylindrical volume that you can use for a pipe
attraction, avoidance, or connection zone. For more information, see Place Cylindrical
Zone Command (on page 113).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 15


SmartPlant Layout

Associate Volume to Object - Establishes a relationship between an object and a


space in the model. For more information, see Associate Volume to Object (on page
115).
Route Pipe - Places pipe runs in the model. For more information, see Route Pipe
(on page 133).
Insert Component - Places valves, tees, and other inline components in the selected
pipe. For more information, see Insert Component (on page 179).
Insert Split - Places a welded split or a takedown joint in the selected pipe. For more
information, see Insert Split (on page 189).

See Also
Automatically Route Command (on page 22)
SmartPlant Layout Common Tasks (on page 18)

16 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 2

Understanding SmartPlant Layout


The auto-routing workflow spans several commands in SmartPlant Layout. But begin by
reviewing the auto-route reference data. Edit the reference data to meet your needs. Then bulk
load the revised auto-route reference data into the catalog. For more information on the
reference data, see the SmartPlant Layout Reference Data Guide.
Using the equipment commands, place the equipment to route between. The layout process
should start as soon as a PFD and a plot size are available. The equipment requirement for
layout work is a range of parametric driven equipment with the ability to create a library of
standard sizes for these pieces of equipment.
For some pieces of equipment the number and location of nozzles is fixed, for example a pump
has inlet and outlet nozzles in fixed positions.
For a basic shell and tube heat exchangers, there are inlet and outlet nozzles for tube and shell
side in fairly standard positions.
For vessels, although the number and exact location may not be known even at PFD stage the
requirement to connect to the top, middle or bottom of a piece of equipment is known. We
recommend that you use the simple library of equipment that is provided with a set of predefined
nozzles that can be added to or deleted.
Then using the Space Management commands, define attraction, avoidance, connection, and
pipe rack zones that the auto router is to consider when routing.
 Connection Zones - These can be used when the position of nozzles are not known. They
can be used either to represent a complete piece of equipment or in association with a
standard piece of equipment to provide a surface to which pipes can be connected. If you
place a connection zone at the end of a pipe rack zone, the connection zone must be at
least 10 cm away from the pipe rack zone. In addition, the connection zone must be wider
and taller than the pipe rack zone.
 Connection Boxes - Use for battery limit boxes and package units where the nozzle
locations are not known or need to "float".
 Connection Cylinders - Use to create a surface on top of a vertical vessel, for example a
batch reactor where nozzle positions are not known. Use to create "bands" at different
heights on a column so that pipes can be connected to top, middle, bottom, and so forth
without the need for a specific nozzle to be present.
 Pipe Zones - These can be added to the equipment building macros to create zones where
the pipes associated with the equipment should run. Most common use is for columns.
 Obstruction Zones - These can be added to the equipment building macros to create zones
where the pipes should not go, such as operations and maintenance access areas.
 Avoidance Zones - These can be added to the equipment building macros to create zones
where you would prefer the pipes not to go.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 17


Understanding SmartPlant Layout

Then using the Piping commands, define the pipe runs to route. You can read the pipe runs in
from P&ID design data if you are working in an integrated environment, or you can create the
pipe runs using the Route Pipe or the Define Run Connection commands. If you route the
runs manually, specify just the start and end locations. Then save the pipe runs to a
spreadsheet for reuse.
 Bend Length - The Bend Length is the length of the leg. As in the diagrams for a 4-inches
bore short radius bend the bend radius is 1D and the Bend Length is 4-inches. For a long
radius bend the radius in 1.5D and the Bend Length is 6- inches. For pulled bends the
radius might be up to 3D and therefore the Bend Length is 12-inches. For auto- routing
considerations the smaller the bend radius the shorter the bend length, the easier it is for the
pipe to route. So 1D bends are preferred for initial routing but it is very worthwhile being able
to easily increase the bend radius to test if the layout is "tight".
 Standout - Standout is the minimum distance from the face of a nozzle before a change of
direction can start. Currently, the standout distance is defined to 10cm.
 Tees - The required dimensions of tees are the inline length and the branch length. For
example, for a 4-inch pipe, the inline length is 8-1/4 inches and the branch length is 4-1/8
inches. For auto-routing purposes the smallest values for in line length is represented by a
set on where it might be the branch bore and the branch length is the bore of the main run
(or header).
 Reducers - When two pipes of a different bore are connected end to end a reducer will be
placed. The larger bore a reasonable approximation the reducer length.
Finally, use the auto-router to save the equipment and zone layouts. We recommend that you
route your primary runs first, and then route the secondary runs. Then route pipe runs using the
different layouts. Save and compare the results of the different layouts.
The Material Cost is the centerline length plus the number of bends multiplied by bend
equivalent length, multiplied by the cost per unit length. The Evaluation Cost is the Material
Cost adjusted by the cost factor for the section of the pipe that run in either Pipe Racks, Pipe
Zones or Avoidance Zones.
See Also
Automatically Route Command (on page 22)
SmartPlant Layout Common Tasks (on page 18)

SmartPlant Layout Common Tasks


The following procedures are used frequently when using SmartPlant Layout. For a complete list
of procedures, click the appropriate chapter on the Contents tab, and then click the procedure
that you want.

Customize Reference Data


 Customize the auto-router reference data.
 Bulk load the edited reference data.

Create Needed Systems


 Create new pipe systems. For more information, see Create a Piping System (on page 131).
 Create new pipelines. For more information, see Create a Pipeline System (on page 131).
 Create new systems for equipment and zones.

18 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Understanding SmartPlant Layout

Place Equipment and Zones


 Place the equipment needed to route between. For more information, see Place Equipment
from the Catalog (on page 42).
 Place the attraction, avoidance, connection, and other zones as needed. For more
information, Place a Volume by Two Points (on page 109).
 Save the equipment and zone layout for comparison with other layouts. For more
information, see Save a Layout (on page 32).

Define and Save Pipe Run Definitions


Define the pipe runs to auto-route. You have several methods for defining the pipe runs.
 Define a New Run and Its Connections (on page 35)
Define Run Connections for an Existing Run (on page 36)
Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for Routing (on page 26)
Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing (on page 27)
 Save the pipe run definitions so that you can route them using different equipment and zone
layouts. For more information, see Save Pipe Run Definitions (on page 28).

Route Pipe Runs


 Verify that the pipe run definitions you have defined will route using the auto- router. For
more information, see Check Runs for Problems (on page 27).
 Route the pipe runs using the auto-router. For more information, see Automatically Route
Pipe Runs (on page 27).

Save and Compare Routing Results


 Save the results of the pipe route with a particular layout. For more information, see Save
Routing Results (on page 31).
 Load another equipment and zone layout, and then reroute the same pipe definitions. For
more information, see Load a Layout (on page 32).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 19


Understanding SmartPlant Layout

Selecting Objects
All objects have properties that you can edit. Using the Select command on the vertical
toolbar, you select the object that you want to edit.

An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon.
The Locate Filter box contains the available, pre-defined filters for the Select command. When
you choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered
objects in a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Pipe
Runs, you can select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The software includes these filters:
Pipelines - Allows you to select only pipelines in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Piping Runs - Allows you to select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Piping Features - Limits the selection of objects to only pipe features. Some examples of
features are straight features, such as pipe, and in-line component features, such as valves.
Piping Parts - Allows you to select in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, only the
individual pipe parts that are associated with a feature. For example, a valve feature might have
several parts: the valve body, the gaskets, and the flanges.
Piping Nozzle - Allows you to select only pipe nozzles in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Equipment - Allows you to select only equipment in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Shape - Limits the selection of items to the individual shapes that compose a designed
equipment object in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Zone - Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to space objects
that are defined as zones.
Interference Volume - Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to
space objects that are defined as interference volumes.
All - Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
Use the Inside fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence.
Use the Inside/Overlapping fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence
and those objects outside but touching the fence at some point.

20 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 3

Auto-Route
The auto router finds the best possible route by considering the equipment layout and location of
other objects (obstacles) in the model, the zones that have been defined, and the cost factor of
each possible route.

Zones
Zones are defined using the Space Management commands. The auto router takes into account
both the location of the zones and the cost factor defined for the zone when evaluating routes.
 Attraction zones are areas where you would like pipe to route if feasible. The cost factor
applied to attraction zones is normally less than 1. The lower the number, the more the
attraction zone attracts pipe.
 Avoidance zones are areas where you would like the auto router to avoid. However, the
auto router will route pipe through an avoidance area if the cost of routing around the
avoidance area is greater the cost of routing through the avoidance area. The cost factor
applied to avoidance zones is normally greater than 1. The higher the number, the more the
avoidance zone repels pipe.
 Connection zones are areas that pipes can connect. Use connection zones when the pipe
runs that you are routing need to connect to pipe runs from another area the plant that are
not modeled yet.
 Pipe rack zones define the locations of pipe racks. The cost factor applied to pipe racks is
normally less than 1. The lower the number, the more the pipe rack attracts pipe.

Cost Factor
Cost factor data is defined in the ..\Layout\Bulkload\Datafiles\Auto Router Rules.xls workbook.
The cost factor has no formal units, the only requirement is that consistent units are used
throughout.
The linear cost is the relative cost per unit length of the route.
The bend cost is the equivalent cost of a bend, expressed as a length of pipe.
The material cost that the auto router calculates and displays in the Results Tab (Auto-Router
Dialog Box) (on page 30) is based on the length, number of bends, linear cost, and bend cost.
(Material cost = Length * Linear Cost + Bend Count * Bend Cost)
The evaluation cost is the material cost adjusted for the length of pipe running through zones.
The presence of the zones modifies the cost of the chosen route, for example, running a pipe on
a rack results in a lower cost for the route.
See Also
Understanding SmartPlant Layout (on page 17)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 21


Auto-Route

Automatically Route Command


The Automatically Route command determines the best route for piping based on an
economic model. The primary use for this command is as a quick pipe run layout tool that you
can use to compare the costs of different plant layout configurations.
The pipe runs created by the auto-router are exactly the same as the pipe runs created with the
Route Pipe command in that you can review and modify run properties, transverse
relationships, and perform any other action as you could with a manually placed pipe run.
See Also
Understanding SmartPlant Layout (on page 17)
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)

Auto-Router Dialog Box


The Auto-Router dialog box is divided functionally into multiple tabs. The Pipe Runs tab
defines which pipe runs are routed. The Reference Data tab displays the settings used to
calculate the route. The Results tab displays the routing results. The Layouts tab swaps
equipment and zone layouts for cost comparison. The Settings tab provides access to I-Route
settings.
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)
Reference Data Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 29)
Results Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 30)
Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 32)
Settings Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 33)
See Also
Automatically Route Command (on page 22)

Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box)


The Pipe Runs tab displays information about the pipe runs that the auto-router will route. The
pipe runs are displayed in a table. You can sort the table by clicking a column heading. The gray
area to the left of each row is the row heading. Click the row heading to select the pipe run on
that row. Selected pipe run rows have a blue background in the table and also highlight in the
model.
Action - Specifies what you want the auto-router to do with the pipe run on that row when you
click Preview or Route.
 Select Route if you want the auto-router to route the pipe run.
 Select Keep to consider the pipe run during the routing process, but you do not want the
router to change the existing route.
 Select 0 Length to mark the run as not to be routed. Use this option to select which run of
two end-to-end connected runs will become a zero length run because the software cannot
arbitrarily select a location in the model for the end-to-end connection. If you do not select
one of the two end-to-end connected runs to be zero length, the software will automatically
select the run with the higher cost to be the zero length run.
 Select Ignore to have the auto-router skip the pipe run entirely during processing. Some
runs may have to be re-routed because they are dependant on another run that is being
re-routed. Dependant runs are indicated by the characters <>.

22 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Skewed - Specifies if all runs must be orthogonal. This option is useful when routing between
two nozzles that are in close proximity, but are slightly offset from one another. Select Yes to
allow the router to select a direct route (example A in figure). Select No to force the route to be
orthogonal (example B in figure).

Status - Displays the word Valid if you have provided enough information so that the pipe run
can likely be routed. Note that Valid pipe runs might not route if the software cannot detect a
problem until after the routing takes place. An example of an undetected problem is an
obstruction very close to a nozzle where it is not possible to route out of the nozzle due to the
minimum standout distance. If the pipe run is not valid, a short explanation of the problem
displays indicating what you need to do to fix the pipe run. The list of messages that you might
see and their meaning are defined in this table.

Message Description
Clash at end of pipe There is something in front of the nozzle preventing the route
connection. The minimum distance required in front of the nozzle is
the sum of the default standout distance (10 cm), the minimum
pipe length defined in the piping specification, and the bend
distance.
Clash at start of pipe There is something in front of the nozzle preventing the route
connection. The minimum distance required in front of the nozzle is
the sum of the default standout distance (10 cm), the minimum
pipe length defined in the piping specification, and the bend
distance.
From Nozzle already used The "from nozzle" of this run already has a pipe run connected to it.
by another run You need to define another "from" location for this pipe run or edit
the other pipe run disconnecting it from the nozzle.
From Run not included The start point of this pipe run is on another pipe run (the header)
that is not in the table of pipe run definitions. Add the header pipe
run to the table. You can identify the missing pipe run by looking in
the From column. The auto-router cannot route branch pipe runs
unless the header pipe run is also routed.
From Run not Valid The start point of this pipe run is on another pipe run. There is a
problem with the other pipe run. Look in the From column to
identify the other run.
Invalid Spec A piping specification has been defined for the pipe run, but the
defined piping specification does not exist in the model's catalog.
Either change the piping specification defined for the pipe run, or
add the missing piping specification to the catalog.
No from point You have selected a point as the starting location, but you have not
defined that location.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 23


Auto-Route

Message Description
No pipeline defined A parent pipeline system has not been defined for the pipe run.
No Pipe spec defined A piping specification has not been defined for the pipe run.
No to point You have selected a point as the ending location, but you have not
defined that location.
Nominal Diameter is not The nominal diameter of the pipe run is either defined as "" or is
specified correctly less than zero. Define a correct nominal diameter for the pipe run.
To Nozzle already used The "to nozzle" of this run already has a pipe run connected to it.
by another run You need to define another "to" location for this pipe run or edit the
other pipe run disconnecting it from the nozzle.
To Run not included The end point of this pipe run is on another pipe run (the header)
that is not in the table of pipe run definitions. Add the header pipe
run to the table. You can identify the missing pipe run by looking in
the To column. The auto-router cannot route branch pipe runs
unless the header pipe run is also routed.
To Run not Valid The end point of this pipe run is on another pipe run. There is a
problem with the other pipe run. Look in the To column to identify
the other run.
Valid The pipe run is valid, and the auto-router can route that pipe run.
Name - Displays the pipe run name. You cannot change the pipe run name here. You can
however, select the row heading to select the pipe run, and then select Edit > Properties to
change the name or other pipe run properties. You may need to re-add the pipe run to the list for
the new properties to appear.
Specification - Displays the pipe specification of the pipe run. You cannot change the pipe
specification here. You can however, select the row heading to select the pipe run, and then
click Properties to change the specification or other pipe run properties. You will need to
re-add the pipe run to the list for the new properties to appear.
Nominal Diameter - Displays the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) for the pipe run. You cannot
change the NPD here. You can however, select the row heading to select the pipe run, and then
click Properties to change the NPD or other pipe run properties. You will need to re-add the
pipe run to the list for the new properties to appear.
From Type - Specifies the type of connection at the start of the pipe run. You can select:
 Select Nozzle to route from an equipment nozzle. After selecting this option, select an
equipment nozzle in the From column that this pipe run is to route from.
 Select Branch to route from another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a pipe run
(the header) in the From column that this pipe run is to branch from.
 Select Zone to route from a connection zone. After selecting this option, select a connection
zone in the From column that this pipe run is to route from. You can create connection
zones in the Space Management task.
 Select Point to route from a point in space. After selecting this option, select a point in
space using the Select from model option in the From column.
 Select Equipment to route from the center of an equipment symbol. After selecting this
option, select a piece of equipment in the From column that this pipe run is to route from.

24 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

 Select End to route from the end of another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a
pipe run end feature in the From column that this pipe run is to route from. End must be
defined in pairs. If you define the From Type of this run as an End, you must define the To
Type of the other pipe run as an End.
From - Displays the start point of the pipe run. What displays in this column depends on what
you have selected in the From Type column. Select <Select from model> to select an object in
the model as the start point.
To Type - Specifies the type of connection at the end of the pipe run. You can select:
 Select Nozzle to route to an equipment nozzle. After selecting this option, select an
equipment nozzle in the To column that this pipe run is to route to.
 Select Branch to route to another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a pipe run (the
header) in the To column that this pipe run is to branch into.
 Select Zone to route to a connection zone. After selecting this option, select a connection
zone in the To column that this pipe run is to route to. You can create connection zones in
the Space Management task.
 Select Point to route to a point in space. After selecting this option, select a point in space
using the Select from model option in the To column.
 Select Equipment to route to the center of an equipment symbol. After selecting this option,
select a piece of equipment in the To column that this pipe run is to route to.
 Select End to route to the end of another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a pipe
run end feature in the To column that this pipe run is to route to. End must be defined in
pairs. If you define the To Type of this run as an End, you must define the From Type of the
other pipe run as an End.
To - Displays the end point of the pipe run. What displays in this column depends on what you
have selected in the To Type column. Select <Select from model> to select an object in the
model as the end point.
Vias Count - Displays the number of zones the pipe run is to pass through. You can add,
modify the order of, and delete zones using the Limit Path Command (on page 36).
Add Runs to the Form - Appends pipe runs that you have selected to the list. You can
select runs in a 3D graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. The software automatically
transfers all the necessary data; pipe run name, specification, NPD, and from and to
connections; to the list. The software automatically adds any pipe runs that were selected before
you activated the Automatically Route command to the list.
Be sure to set the locate filter to Piping Runs before you start selecting the pipe runs to
include.
Select Runs From P&ID - Opens a list of P&ID drawings from which you can select. After
selecting a P&ID drawing from the list, all pipe runs in that drawing are added to the pipe runs
list for routing. The P&ID design data must be available.
Import Runs From Spreadsheet - Appends pipe runs that you have previously saved to a
Microsoft Excel workbook to the list.
Export Runs to Spreadsheet - Saves the pipe runs currently displayed in the list to a
Microsoft Excel workbook. You can then read the pipe runs back into the list using the Import
Runs From Spreadsheet command.
Preview - Processes all pipe runs marked as Route in the Action column to check for
errors. The results for each pipe run highlight in the model and are provided on the Results tab,
but the actual pipe runs are NOT deleted and re-routed in the model. We recommend that you
preview and fix all found errors before you route runs. If all pipe runs are acceptable, you can
click Route to place the runs in the model.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 25


Auto-Route

Route - Processes all pipe runs marked as Route in the Action the column. The results for
each pipe run are provided on the Results tab. The pipe runs are routed in the model.
If you are auto-routing existing pipe runs in the model, the auto-router will NOT
remodel any components (such as valves or flange takedown joints) that may be present in the
existing pipe run. The components are deleted.
Properties - Activates the Pipe Run Properties dialog box. For more information, see Pipe
Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 211).
Clear Runs - Removes the select pipe run from the list. You select which pipe run to remove
by clicking the row heading. If no pipe runs are selected, you are prompted whether or not to
remove all the pipe runs from the list. Click Yes to remove all the pipe run definitions from the
list. The Clear Runs command only removes pipe runs from the list in the Auto-Router dialog
box. The pipe runs that are in the model are not affected in any way. You cannot undo the Clear
Runs action. Use the Export Runs to Spreadsheet command to save any pipe runs that
you may want to route again before you use the Clear Runs command.
See Also
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)
Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for Routing (on page 26)
Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing (on page 27)
Load Pipe Run Definitions (on page 28)
Remove a Pipe Run from the Table (on page 28)
Automatically Route Pipe Runs (on page 27)
Save Pipe Run Definitions (on page 28)
Check Runs for Problems (on page 27)

Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for Routing


1. Click Automatically Route to activate the auto-router dialog box.
2. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
3. Click Select .
4. In the locate filter, select Piping Runs.
5. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the existing pipe runs in the model to
add to the table for routing.
Press the CTRL key to select multiple pipe runs to add.
6. Click Add Runs to the Form in the Auto-Router dialog box.

 You can also select the pipe runs first, and then activate the command. All selected runs are
automatically added to the list when the command is activated.
 You can also select pipe runs from a P&ID drawing if they are available. Use the
SmartPlant > View P&ID command to display the P&ID drawings. The software
automatically correlates pipe runs selected from a P&ID drawing when they are routed by
the auto-router if the equipment is already correlated.
 You can save pipe run definitions using the Export Runs to Spreadsheet on the Pipe
Runs tab.
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

26 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing


1. Click Select .
2. In the locate filter, select Piping Runs.
3. Click Automatically Route to activate the auto-router dialog box.
4. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
5. Click Select Runs From P&ID in the Auto-Router dialog box.
6. Select the P&ID drawing that contains the pipe runs to route.
You can save pipe run definitions using the Export Runs to Spreadsheet on the
Pipe Runs tab.
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

Check Runs for Problems


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
2. Add the pipe runs to check.
3. Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for Routing (on page 26)
Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing (on page 27)
4. Click Preview .
5. Select the Results tab.
6. Review the Route Status column for problems.
The Preview command processes the runs as if they were going to be routed, but does
not actually route the runs in the model.
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

Automatically Route Pipe Runs


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
2. Add the pipe runs to route.
3. Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for Routing (on page 26)
Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing (on page 27)
4. Click Route .
5. Select the Results tab.
6. Review the routing results.
If you are auto-routing existing pipe runs in the model, the auto-router will NOT
remodel any components (such as valves or flange takedown joints) that may be present in the
existing pipe run. The components are deleted. You are prompted to continue if such
components exist on a pipe run.
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 27


Auto-Route

Remove a Pipe Run from the Table


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
2. Click the row header for the pipe run to remove.
The row header is the gray cell on the left end of the row.
3. Click Clear Runs .

 You can remove all pipe runs from the table by clicking Clear Runs without selecting an
individual pipe run in the table first. When you are prompted to confirm that you want to
delete all the pipe runs, click Yes.
 You cannot undo the removal of pipe runs from the table. If you want to use the pipe runs
later, use the Export Runs to Spreadsheet on the Pipe Runs tab before you clear the
pipe runs.
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

Save Pipe Run Definitions


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
2. Click Export Runs to Spreadsheet .
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the pipe run definitions.
4. Type a name for the file.
5. Click Save.
You can load pipe run definitions using the Import Runs From Spreadsheet . For
more information, see Load Pipe Run Definitions (on page 28).
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

Load Pipe Run Definitions


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the dialog box.
2. Click Import Runs From Spreadsheet .
3. Navigate to the folder where the file is stored.
4. Select the file.
5. Click Open.
You can save pipe run definitions using the Export Runs to Spreadsheet on the
Pipe Runs tab. For more information, see Save Pipe Run Definitions (on page 28).
See Also
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 22)

28 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Reference Data Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box)


The Reference Data tab displays the settings used to calculate the pipe run route. You cannot
change the values on this dialog box tab. However, if you double-click one of the values, the
software activates the Layout tab of the Pipe Run Properties dialog box where you can edit
the values.
Name - Displays the pipe run name.
Routing Fluid Code - Displays the fluid code of the pipe run.
Shoe Height - Displays the vertical separation between a rack face and the bottom of pipe run.
Bend Cost Factor - Displays the bend cost for the NPD size as the equivalent cost of a bend,
expressed as a length of pipe. The cost factor has no formal units; the only requirement is that
consistent units are used throughout.
Bend Length - Displays the leg length (the distance from the start to the center) of the bend or
elbow to use in the calculation.
Branch Air Gap - Displays the separation between adjacent branches connecting to the same
header. If the branch gap value is greater than the in line length, this value will take precedence.
Joint Air Gap - Displays the separation to be used between adjacent joints (for example,
flanges or compression fittings). If the Piping Materials Class has flange joints, the flange
diameter plus this value determines the pipe separation.
Joint Diameter - Displays the diameter of the default joint. For example, if the piping
specification is a flanged specification, you should set this to the diameter of the flange.
Alternatively, in a butt welded piping specification, you should set this to zero. For flanged
specifications, the Joint Diameter plus the Joint Air Gap determines the pipe separation. For butt
welded specifications, the Nominal Pipe Size plus the Pipe Air Gap determines the pipe
separation.
Linear Cost Factor - Displays the linear cost for the NPD size as relative cost per unit length of
the route. The cost factor has no formal units; the only requirement is that consistent units are
used throughout.
Minimum Expansion Leg - Displays the minimum straight pipe length for hot/cold pipe based
on expansion/contraction and flexibility considerations
Maximum Expansion Leg - Displays the maximum straight pipe length for hot/cold pipe based
on expansion/contraction and flexibility considerations
Maximum Span - Displays the maximum allowed unsupported length of pipe.
Pipe Air Gap- Displays the separation required between adjacent pipes of the same nominal
size. If the Piping Materials Class has butt welded joints, the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) and
this value determines the pipe separation. Where adjacent pipes have different NPD sizes, the
separation is half that for pipe 1 plus half that for pipe 2.
See Also
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 29


Auto-Route

Results Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box)


The Results tab displays the results of the most recent auto-route process, whether it was a
validation run or an actual routing run. You can use the Export Runs to Spreadsheet
command on the Pipe Runs tab save the results to a Microsoft Excel workbook for cost
comparison with other layouts.
The pipe run results are displayed in a table. You can sort the table by clicking a column
heading. The gray area to the left of each row is the row heading. Click the row heading to
select the pipe run on that row. When you select a pipe run in the list, the pipe run highlights in
the model.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run.
Route Status - Displays the resulting status of the pipe run. The list of messages that you might
see and their meaning are defined in this table.

Message Description
Cannot route From The header run was not included in the routing or failed to route. Select
Tee, because the the Pipe Runs tab and look in the From column to identify the header
header run not found run.
From Run not Valid The start point of this pipe run is on another pipe run. There is a
problem with the other pipe run. Select the Pipe Runs tab and look in
the From column to identify the other run.
Invalid From End The starting location for the run is invalid. Select the Pipe Runs tab and
define a new from point in the From column.
Invalid To End The ending location for the run is invalid. Select the Pipe Runs tab and
define a new end point in the To column.
Successfully Routed The auto-router was able to route the pipe run without problems.
The connection zone There is something in front of the nozzle preventing the route
at the To end is too connection. The minimum distance required in front of the nozzle is the
small. sum of the default standout distance (10 cm), the minimum pipe length
defined in the piping specification, and the bend distance.
The connection zone There is something in front of the nozzle preventing the route
at the From end is connection. The minimum distance required in front of the nozzle is the
too small. sum of the default standout distance (10 cm), the minimum pipe length
defined in the piping specification, and the bend distance.
This run failed The end point of this pipe run is on another pipe run. There is a problem
because the To run with the other pipe run. Select the Pipe Runs tab and look in the To
failed. column to identify the other run.
This run failed The auto-router could not route this branch run because the header run
because the From failed to route. You need to resolve the header run problem to resolve
run failed. this branch run problem. Look in the From column to identify the other
run.
To Run not Valid The end point of this pipe run is on another pipe run. There is a problem
with the other pipe run. Select the Pipe Runs tab and look in the To
column to identify the other run.

30 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Message Description
Unable to resolve The auto-router discovered a clash when routing and could not find an
clash alternative route.
Valid The auto-router verified the pipe run could be routed without problems,
but did not actually route the pipe run.
Zero Length This run and another run are end-to-end connected. The software
cannot arbitrarily select a location in the model for this end-to-end
connection, and therefore must set one of the two runs to be zero
length. This run has a higher cost so the software automatically
selected it to be the zero- length run.
Total Length - Displays the total length of the pipe run from start to end.
Number of Turns - Displays the total number of pipe bends and elbows in the pipe run.
Material Cost - Displays the material cost of the pipe run. This material cost value is determined
by cost factors defined in the reference data and can be used for cost comparisons with other
layouts.
Evaluation Cost - Displays the evaluation cost of the pipe run. This evaluation cost value is
determined by cost factors defined in the reference data and can be used for cost comparisons
with other layouts.
Pipe Clashes - Displays for each pipe the number of clashes between the pipe and other pipes.
Other Clashes - Displays the number of clashes between the pipe and obstructions.
See Also
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)
Save Routing Results (on page 31)

Save Routing Results


1. Select the Pipe Runs tab on the Auto-Router dialog box.
2. Click Export Runs to Spreadsheet .
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the results file.
4. Type a name for the file.
5. Click Save.
See Also
Results Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 30)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 31


Auto-Route

Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box)


The Layouts tab allows you to save and retrieve equipment and zone layouts to find the optimal
layout. Layouts are saved to Microsoft Excel workbooks.
This functionality is very specific to a given set of equipment and zones. As you add and
delete equipment and zones, the layout information only applies to those objects in the layout
file that still exist. This file is intended for short term use for comparing different layouts.
Layout - Lists all available Microsoft Excel workbooks in the specified layout location.
Layout Location - Specifies the folder where the layout workbooks are stored.
Load Equipment and Zones - Loads the selected layout in the model. You must select a
Microsoft Excel workbook from the layout list before you can select this command.
Save Equipment and Zones - Saves the current equipment and zone layout to a Microsoft
Excel workbook. You can then reload the layout later using the Load command.
See Also
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)
Load a Layout (on page 32)
Save a Layout (on page 32)

Load a Layout
1. Select the Layout tab on the Auto-Router dialog box.
2. Click ... and navigate to the folders where the layout file is stored.
3. Select the layout file to load from the list.
4. Click Load Equipment and Zones .
See Also
Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 32)

Save a Layout
1. Select the Layout tab on the dialog box.
2. Click Save Equipment and Zones .
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the layout file.
4. Type a name for the layout file.
5. Click Save.
Only zones and equipment in the currently defined workspace are saved to the layout
file.
See Also
Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) (on page 32)

32 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Settings Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box)


The Settings tab controls optional features of the I-Route software. I-Route is the pipe routing
engine used to lay out the pipe runs.

Equipment Aspects
By default, the software approximates the physical aspects of equipment and passes them to
I-Route as obstruction zones. You can choose to also send the operation and maintenance
aspects to I-Route.
Export operation aspect as - Select to export the operation aspect of equipment to the routing
engine. You can select whether the operation aspect is sent as an avoidance zone or as an
obstruction zone.
Export maintenance aspect as - Select to export the maintenance aspect of equipment to the
routing engine. You can select whether the maintenance aspect is sent as an avoidance zone or
as an obstruction zone.
Cost Factor Avoidance Zones - If you selected Avoidance for either the operation or the
maintenance aspect, specify the cost factor for the avoidance zones.

Diagnostics
Write XML Diagnostics before running I-Route - Select to save diagnostic data to an XML file
before I-Route calculates the pipe run lay outs. You can view the XML file by pressing
CTRL+SHIFT+X.
Write XML Diagnostics after running I-Route - Select to save diagnostic data to an XML file
after I-Route has calculated the pipe run routes. You can view the XML file by pressing
CTRL+SHIFT+X.
Save I-Route Error Log and Trace File - Select to save the I-Route error log and trace file.

Other Settings
Ignore Soft clashes - Reports soft clashes (between a pipe and a pipe envelope or air gap) and
continues auto-routing. This option does not modify the route to avoid them. By default, soft
clashes are not ignored, which is the behavior in previous versions of the software.
This setting can have a significant effect on the calculation of pipe routes and should be
used early on in the layout process where it is important to identify high density areas. These
areas can be modified so that the clash goes away. As the equipment layout becomes fixed
through the evolution of the design, the setting can be unchecked, if required.
See Also
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 33


Auto-Route

Define Run Connections Command


The Define Run Connections command provides efficient means to create or select runs
and defines the start and stop connections for a run. Runs created or selected through this
command are automatically added to the list of runs in the AutoRoute dialog box.
For more information, see Define Run Connections Ribbon (on page 34).
See Also
Define a New Run and Its Connections (on page 35)
Define Run Connections for an Existing Run (on page 36)
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)

Define Run Connections Ribbon


Display options available when defining run connections.
New Run - Activates the New Run dialog box, which defines the properties of the new run.
For more information about this dialog box, see New Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 154).
Select Run - Allows you to select existing runs in the model or the Workspace Explorer for
which to define the From and To points.
From - Defines the start point of the run. What displays in this option depends on what you
have selected in the Connection Type option. Select <Select from model> to select an object
in the model as the start point.
To - Defines the end point of the run. What displays in this option depends on what you have
selected in the Connection Type option. Select <Select from model> to select an object in the
model as the end point.
Connection Type - Specifies the type of connection at the start and end of the run. You can
select:
 Select Branch to route from another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a pipe run
(the header) in the From step that this pipe run is to branch from.
 Select Zone to route from a connection zone. After selecting this option, select a connection
zone in the From step that this pipe run is to route from. You can create connection zones in
the Space Management task.
 Select End to route from the end of another pipe run. After selecting this option, select a
pipe run end feature in the From step that this pipe run is to route from. End must be defined
in pairs.
 Select Equipment to route from the center of an equipment symbol. After selecting this
option, select a piece of equipment in the From step that this pipe run is to route from.
 Select Nozzle to route from an equipment nozzle. After selecting this option, select an
equipment nozzle in the From step that this pipe run is to route from.
 Select Point to route from a point in space. After selecting this option, select a point in
space using the Select from model option in the From step.
Standout - Enter the minimum straight length of pipe which the router must include before a
change of direction when connecting to / from a nozzle.
Connection Behavior - Specifies what the software is to do when the pipe run and nozzle have
different NPDs. Select Connect to have the auto-router add the necessary reducers to the pipe
run to resize the pipe run NPD to match the nozzle NPD. Select Resize to have the auto-router
resize the nozzle NPD to match the NPD of the pipe run.

34 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Orientation - Select the branch orientation.


 Any - Select this option to allow the software to choose the most economical orientation for
the branch.
 East - The branch is to face east.
 North - The branch is to face north.
 Top - The branch is to face up (out the top of the pipe).
 West - The branch is to face west.
 South - The branch is to face south.
 Bottom - The branch is to face down (out the bottom of the pipe).
 Not Top - The branch can face in any direction except up.
 Not Bottom - The branch can face in any direction except down.
Centered - Select True if want the branch to be centered on a straight section of the pipe run.
Select False to allow the branch to be placed anywhere along the straight section of the pipe
run.
Direction - Select the direction you want the pipe run facing at the connection point. You can
select: None, East, North, Up, West, South, or Down.
See Also
Define Run Connections Command (on page 34)
Auto-Router Dialog Box (on page 22)

Define a New Run and Its Connections


1. Select Define Run Connections on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click New Run on the ribbon.
3. Define the properties for the new pipe run in the New Pipe Run dialog box.
4. Click OK on the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select the "from" connection type from the pull down list.
 If the connection type is a nozzle, type the minimum standout from the "from"
connection before a turn can be placed, and select the "from" connection behavior.
Select Connect to have the auto-router add the necessary reducers to the pipe run to
resize the pipe run NPD to match the nozzle NPD. Select Resize to have the
auto-router resize the nozzle NPD to match the NPD of the pipe run.
 If the connection type is a branch, select the branch orientation that you want and if the
branch should be centered on the header run.
 If the connection type is a point, select the direction you want to route in from that point.
6. Identify the "from" connection in the model.
7. Select the "to" connection type from the pull down list.
 If the connection type is a nozzle, type the minimum standout from the "from"
connection before a turn can be placed, and select the "from" connection behavior.
Select Connect to have the auto-router add the necessary reducers to the pipe run to
resize the pipe run NPD to match the nozzle NPD. Select Resize to have the
auto-router resize the nozzle NPD to match the NPD of the pipe run.
 If the connection type is a branch, select the branch orientation that you want and if the
branch should be centered on the header run.
 If the connection type is a point, select the direction you want to route in from that point.
8. Identify the "to" connection in the model.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 35


Auto-Route

Define Run Connections for an Existing Run


1. Select Define Run Connections on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Select Run on the ribbon.
3. In the model or the Workspace Explorer, select the pipe run.
4. Select the "from" connection type from the pull down list.
 If the connection type is a nozzle, type the minimum standout from the "from"
connection before a turn can be placed, and select the "from" connection behavior.
Select Connect to have the auto-router add the necessary reducers to the pipe run to
resize the pipe run NPD to match the nozzle NPD. Select Resize to have the
auto-router resize the nozzle NPD to match the NPD of the pipe run.
 If the connection type is a branch, select the branch orientation that you want and if the
branch should be centered on the header run.
 If the connection type is a point, select the direction you want to route in from that point.
5. Identify the "from" connection in the model.
6. Select the "to" connection type from the pull down list.
 If the connection type is a nozzle, type the minimum standout from the "from"
connection before a turn can be placed, and select the "from" connection behavior.
Select Connect to have the auto-router add the necessary reducers to the pipe run to
resize the pipe run NPD to match the nozzle NPD. Select Resize to have the
auto-router resize the nozzle NPD to match the NPD of the pipe run.
 If the connection type is a branch, select the branch orientation that you want and if the
branch should be centered on the header run.
 If the connection type is a point, select the direction you want to route in from that point.
7. Identify the "to" connection in the model.
See Also
Define Run Connections Command (on page 34)

36 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Auto-Route

Limit Path Command


The Limit Path command defines which volumes that the automatically generated route
must pass through. You can assign volumes to a pipe run independently, or you can assign
multiple pipe runs the same set of volumes.
Limit Path Ribbon (on page 37)
See Also
Add Volume to Path Limit (on page 37)
Remove Volume from Path Limit (on page 38)
Reordering Volumes in a Path (on page 38)

Limit Path Ribbon


Display options available when defining run connections.
Select Runs - Select the runs to limit.
Select Volumes - Select the volumes to which to restrict the runs.
Reorder Volumes - Activates the Limit Path dialog box in which you can define the order of
the volumes that the run should pass through. For more information, see Limit Path Dialog Box
(on page 37).
Cancel - Resets your selections.
Accept - Confirms that the objects that you have selected as the ones you want.
Finish - Assigns the volumes to the run.
See Also
Limit Path Command (on page 36)
Add Volume to Path Limit (on page 37)
Remove Volume from Path Limit (on page 38)
Reordering Volumes in a Path (on page 38)

Limit Path Dialog Box


Confines the pipe run path to selected volumes. The auto-router routes the pipe run through all
volumes in the list in starting with the first volume in the list. Use Move Up and Move Down to
change the routing order of the volumes. You can access this dialog box by using the Limit
Path command, or by viewing the pipe run properties dialog box and then selecting the Via
Volumes tab.
Remove - Deletes the selected volume from the list.
Move Up - Moves the selected volume to a higher location in the list.
Move Down - Moves the selected volume to a lower location in the list.
See Also
Limit Path Command (on page 36)
Add Volume to Path Limit (on page 37)
Remove Volume from Path Limit (on page 38)
Reordering Volumes in a Path (on page 38)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 37


Auto-Route

Add Volume to Path Limit


1. Select Limit Path on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe runs to limit.
3. Click Accept .
4. Select the volumes to limit the run to.
5. Click Finish
See Also
Limit Path Command (on page 36)
Limit Path Dialog Box (on page 37)
Limit Path Ribbon (on page 37)

Reordering Volumes in a Path


1. Select Limit Path on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe run.
3. Click Accept .
4. Click Reorder Volumes .
5. In the list, select the volume to reorder.
6. Click Move Up and Move Down until the volumes are in the order that you want.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Finish.
See Also
Limit Path Command (on page 36)
Limit Path Dialog Box (on page 37)
Limit Path Ribbon (on page 37)

Remove Volume from Path Limit


1. Select Limit Path on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe run.
3. Click Accept .
4. Click Reorder Volumes .
5. In the list, select the volume to remove.
6. Click Remove.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Finish.
See Also
Limit Path Command (on page 36)
Limit Path Dialog Box (on page 37)
Limit Path Ribbon (on page 37)

38 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 4

Place Equipment
Specifies any piece of equipment from the Equipment folder of the catalog and places an
occurrence of it inside the model. You can modify the offset of the equipment, its relationships to
other equipment, and other properties during or after placement. Using positioning relationships,
the Place Equipment command allows you to mate, connect, or align equipment, and you can
use common tools like the PinPoint command for precise positioning of the equipment.
You place equipment objects into the model by selecting the equipment from the Select
Equipment dialog box and positioning the equipment in the model using the available
relationships. When you select an equipment object from the Catalog, you can define a default
surface so that, when the equipment is placed into the model, the software automatically creates
a relationship to any other surface or reference element that you select. For example, you might
define the bottom of a pump as the default surface because you want the software to mate that
surface to the floor. If the software cannot find a suitable mating surface for the equipment, the
equipment object is placed in free space, pending additional design of the structures or other
reference elements.
You can also provide an optional offset distance from the surface or reference elements. The
default offset distance for any new piece of equipment is zero or the last offset used in the
current session. The software maintains the offset relationship between the default surface and
the surface or reference element in the workspace in the event of any changes to their position
(for example, if a slab is lowered, then the equipment follows the slab, maintaining the offset).
You can further define the equipment position and orientation by mating, aligning, or connecting
equipment to other objects in the model, or by moving or rotating the equipment.
In addition to placing equipment from the Select Equipment dialog box, you can also drag and
drop equipment directly from the Catalog Browser in another session opened on the same
computer. In this case, the software places the equipment in free space, with relationship to
other elements in the model being made by locating objects while dragging the equipment in the
new session.

Cable and Equipment


If you are going to use an object for routing cable, you must not model that object as equipment.
Although it may sometimes be desirable to model a piece of raceway, cable tray, or cable bus
as a piece of equipment, you should not do this if there is any possibility of ever needing to route
cable through the object. The reason is because cable routes cannot traverse equipment; they
can only be terminated by equipment. A cable cannot be properly routed through a piece of
equipment. The cable can only interconnect two pieces of equipment.
An example is a pull box. This object should be created in the catalog data as a conduit fitting,
not a piece of equipment. Otherwise, the object will render conduit networks useless for cable
routing every time it is used.

Equipment with Occurrence Properties Modeled Using Solid Edge


You cannot place equipment with occurrence properties modeled using Solid Edge unless Solid
Edge is installed on your computer. If you try to place such an object, the following message
appears: Cannot start Solid Edge. Exiting InitializSymbolDefinition.
As a workaround to the Solid Edge requirement, you can use the Bulkload utility with the flavors
option. Designers can create dozens of variations for any equipment part imaginable. Also, by

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 39


Place Equipment

creating several variations of a part, rather than using occurrence properties to create the
variations automatically, designers can implement custom Solid Edge equipment without having
to install Solid Edge on every designer's computer.
Each variation of a part represents some minor deviation from the catalog part, be it on the basis
of size, operational specifications, or material. With Solid Edge, new variations can be created
on the basis of size, while the software allows manipulation of the operating parameters or
material of construction in the reference data. For more information on bulkloading with flavors,
refer to the SmartPlant Layout Reference Data Guide, accessible from the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software.

Place Equipment Ribbon


Sets options for adding equipment to your model. This ribbon appears automatically after you
select the Place Equipment command and then select an equipment object, or when you
select an existing piece of equipment.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read
the ToolTip.
Equipment Properties - Edits the occurrence properties and reviews the static properties of
an existing piece of equipment. Equipment properties can be set only after an equipment object
is placed in the model. Equipment properties can be edited only after the object is placed in the
model.
Any object modeled in Solid Edge that has occurrence properties cannot be placed or
modified unless your computer has a copy of Solid Edge installed.

User Defined Form Definition – Displays User Defined Form for the particular
equipment if it is defined in the catalog. See the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data
Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Relationship List - Lists all relationships for the selected equipment and provides an option for
creating a new relationship if the equipment is not already fully constrained. An equipment part
is fully constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to prevent movement or rotation
of the part along all three coordinate axes.
Positioning Relationships - Displays the available options for types of positioning
relationships. Some options may not be available for all equipment types. See Positioning
Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship - Removes the selected relationship from the equipment model and the
database. Using the Relationships list box, select a previously existing relationship for the
equipment, and click Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when modifying
existing equipment.
Equipment Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the equipment to be placed that
will be affected by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step
moves to create the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step
remains fixed.
Second Part Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the equipment object or
reference element already in the model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After
you select the reference, the software repositions the first equipment part chosen with respect to
the second part selected in the definition of the relationship.
Offset - Defines the offset distance for a mate or align relationship. Offsets are disabled when
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial equipment placement if
needed.

40 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Equipment

Name - Displays the equipment name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts
changes to that name.
System - Specifies the system with which to associate the selected equipment. The default
system is the Plant itself.

Select Equipment Dialog Box


Specifies the equipment needed for placement. This dialog box appears automatically when you
click the Place Equipment command. By browsing through the part hierarchy, you can find
any piece of equipment in the Catalog database. After you select a piece of equipment and click
OK, the Equipment Properties dialog box appears so you can define properties for the new
equipment. After you click OK on the Properties dialog box, the software returns you to the
model so you can finalize configuration and placement.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected equipment part or node. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific part you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected equipment part or node that you moved away from
by using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the
specific part you need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the Equipment catalog hierarchy. Use
this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific part you need.
Properties - Displays the equipment properties as defined in the catalog.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be
assigned to the equipment in the catalog reference data.
List View - Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a spreadsheet-style grid view.

What do you want to do?


 Place equipment from the catalog (on page 42)
 Set positioning relationships for equipment (on page 42)
 Place doors from the catalog (on page 43)
 Place windows from the catalog (on page 43)
 Edit equipment properties (on page 44)
 Edit equipment relationships (on page 44)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 41


Place Equipment

Place equipment from the catalog


1. Click Place Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment dialog box appears.
2. Locate the necessary equipment type using the tree view. Expand the nodes for the general
type of equipment that you need, continuing until a list of available parts appears in the
catalog window.
3. In the list view, select the equipment object.
4. Click OK on the Select Equipment dialog box.
The Equipment Properties dialog box appears so you can define properties for the new
piece of equipment.
5. Define properties as needed, and then click OK to return to the workspace and place the
equipment. For more information, see Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45).
6. Click in a graphic view to select the mounting surface and approximate position for the
equipment.
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the equipment by 90- degree increments at
any time during the placement of the equipment. Press the up arrow key to scroll through
the three possible axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.
7. Using the Place Equipment ribbon, do any of the following, if needed:
a. Set an offset for the equipment relationship by entering the distance in the Offset box.
b. Click Properties on the ribbon, and enter any necessary property information in the
grid provided on the Equipment Properties dialog box.
c. Add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Relationship list on the
Place Equipment ribbon.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new equipment in the System box.
If you are going to use an object for routing cable, you must not model that object as
equipment. For example, a pull box should be created in the catalog data as a conduit fitting, not
a piece of equipment. Otherwise, the object will render conduit networks useless for cable
routing every time it is used.

Set positioning relationships for equipment


1. Select the equipment for which you need to define a relationship.
2. In the Relationship List box on the Place Equipment ribbon, select <New Relationship>.
3. Select one of the available positioning relationships in the Positioning Relationships list
box, and follow the status bar prompts.
Depending on the type of positioning relationship defined in the previous step, surfaces
or points need to be defined to finish configuring the relationship. For more information, see
Positioning Relationships.

42 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Equipment

Place doors from the catalog


1. Click Place Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment dialog box appears.
2. Locate the door to place under the Equipment > Architectural > Doors node.
3. In the list view, select the door to place.
4. Click OK on the Select Equipment dialog box.
The Equipment Properties dialog box appears so you can define properties for the new
door.
5. Define properties as needed, and then click OK to return to the workspace and place the
door. For more information, see Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45).
6. Click in a graphic view to select the mounting surface and approximate position for the door.
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the door by 90-degree increments at any
time during the placement of the door. Press the up arrow key to scroll through the three
possible axes of rotation.
7. Using the Place Equipment ribbon, do any of the following, if needed:
a. Set an offset for the door relationship by entering the distance in the Offset box.
b. Click Properties on the ribbon, and enter any necessary property information in the
grid provided on the Equipment Properties dialog box.
c. Add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Relationship list on the
Place Equipment ribbon.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new door in the System box. We
recommend that you place the door in the same system as the parent wall.

Place windows from the catalog


1. Click Place Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment dialog box appears.
2. Locate the window to place under the Equipment > Architectural > Windows node.
3. In the list view, select the window part to place.
4. Click OK on the Select Equipment dialog box.
The Equipment Properties dialog box appears so you can define properties for the new
window.
5. Define properties as needed, and then click OK to return to the workspace and place the
window. For more information, see Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45).
6. Click in a graphic view to select the mounting surface and approximate position for the
window.
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the window by 90-degree increments at
any time during the placement of the window. Press the up arrow key to scroll through the
three possible axes of rotation.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 43


Place Equipment

7. Using the Place Equipment ribbon, do any of the following, if needed:


a. Set an offset for the window by entering the distance in the Offset box.
b. Click Properties on the ribbon, and enter any necessary property information in the
grid provided on the Equipment Properties dialog box.
c. Add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Relationship list on the
Place Equipment ribbon.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new window in the System box. We
recommend that you place the window in the same system as the parent wall.

Edit equipment properties


1. Select the equipment object that you need to modify.
2. Click Equipment Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
The Equipment Properties dialog appears.
You can also access the Equipment Properties dialog box by selecting Properties
from the Edit menu, or by right-clicking the selected object and choosing Properties from
the short-cut menu.
3. Access the appropriate dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.
4. Click OK to save your changes, and return to the workspace.
You can also select Apply to put the changes into effect and continue working in the
Equipment Properties dialog box.

 All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the MS Excel
workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or editing
different types of properties, refer to the SmartPlant 3D Reference Data User's Guide
accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command.
 If more than one piece of equipment is selected, the Occurrence tab will only display the
common occurrence properties of the objects.
 The Definition, Connections, Weight & CG, and Relationship tabs are read-only. You
cannot edit this information from the Equipment Properties dialog box.
 If the equipment model was created using Solid Edge, then any changes that would affect
the shape or size of the equipment model require that you have Solid Edge running on your
computer.

Edit equipment relationships


1. Select the equipment that you need to modify.
To edit the properties of a designed equipment object for which geometry has yet to be
defined, you must select the object from the system hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Specify the relationship in the Relationship List box.
3. Change the type of relationship using the Positioning Relationship box as needed.

44 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Equipment

4. Set positioning relationships for equipment (on page 42)


Set positioning relationships for designed equipment (on page 54)
You can remove relationships by clicking Delete Relationship on the ribbon.
This step is often necessary when moving previously constrained equipment. After a
relationship is deleted, no connectivity remains between the two pieces of equipment during
further design operations.

Equipment Properties Dialog Box


Displays equipment properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 45)
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 49)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Notes Tab (on page 197)
Edit Equipment Properties (on page 44)
Edit Equipment Relationships (on page 44)

Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)


Displays all the editable instance-specific information about the selected equipment object. The
property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears
on the right side of the grid. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
occurrence properties for the selected objects appear on the tab.
When viewing properties for a single equipment object, the following properties appear. More
properties may appear depending on what you defined in the reference data. For more
information about occurrences defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and
Furnishings Reference Data Guide available with the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Because equipment properties are customizable in the equipment and furnishings
reference data, only the properties that are required by the software are documented.
Display Equipment Preview - Displays the bitmap image associated with the equipment
object if it has been defined in the reference data. The image displays in a separate window.
Category - Select the properties to view, modify, or define. Equipment properties are divided
into several different categories: Standard, Insulation and Tracing, Weight and CG, Fabrication
and Construction, Surface Treatment and Coating, Position and Orientation, and Responsibility.

Standard
Name - Displays the name of the equipment object. The equipment name is based on the Name
Rule selection. If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User
Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to use to name this equipment object. You can select one
of the listed rules or select User Defined to specify the equipment name yourself in the Name
box.
Description - Enter a description for the equipment object.
System - Select the system to which the equipment belongs. By default, the model is the parent
system for equipment objects.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 45


Place Equipment

Reporting Requirements - Displays the reporting requirement for the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Reporting Type sheet in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the reference data.
Reporting Type - Displays the type of reporting. To add, edit, or remove values that are
available for selection, edit the Reporting Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the
reference data.
Correlation Status - Displays whether or not the equipment object has been correlated to an
equipment object in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the equipment object is correlated to a P&ID equipment object.
Select Correlate Object if the equipment has a correlating equipment object in a P&ID. Select
No correlation is required if the equipment object does not have a correlating equipment
object in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the equipment object is approved with discrepancies
in the three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the equipment object topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and
Topology mismatches approved if the equipment object data and topology mismatches can
be ignored. Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Is Insulated - Displays whether or not the equipment object is insulated.
Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use
the insulation defined by the equipment object, this field cannot be changed. However, if
Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation thickness from those allowed
for the material in the reference data.
Requirement - Displays the requirement of the insulation.
Insulation Type - Displays the type of the insulation.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set
to use the insulation defined by the equipment object, the information in this box cannot be
changed. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the purpose of the
insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference data.
Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, this field cannot be changed. However, if Insulation
Specification is manually defined, select the insulation material from those available from the
reference data.
Operating Temperature - Displays the operating temperature.
Insulation Surface Area - Displays the measurement of the surface area of insulation.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the equipment is heat-traced. To add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium sheet in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the reference data.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. To add, edit, or remove values that are
available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. To add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the
Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the unit of measurement of temperature, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius
for example, when specifying this value.

46 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Equipment

Weight & CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected equipment objects. The
center-of-gravity locations are displayed in global system coordinates along the X-, Y-, and
Z-axes. The software includes the insulation weight in the calculated weight. If you key-in the
weight yourself, you must include the insulation weight value.
Dry Weight - Displays the dry weight of the equipment object.
Wet Weight - Displays the wet weight of the equipment object.
For Equipment, the Weight and CG property "Wet Weight" is the sum of Dry Weight and
Water Weight. The dry weight and water weight values are catalog properties entered on the
part sheet for the equipment.
Dry CGX - Displays the X-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CGY - Displays the Y-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CGZ - Displays the Z-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Wet CGX - Displays the X-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CGY - Displays the Y-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CGZ - Displays the Z-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.

Fabrication and Construction


Fabrication Requirement - Select the fabrication requirement for the equipment. To add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Fabrication Type - Select the type of fabrication for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove
values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the Catalog task.
Construction Requirement - Select the construction requirement for the equipment. To add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in
the Catalog task.
Construction Type - Select the type of construction for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove
values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in the Catalog task.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the coating requirement for the equipment. To add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the type of coating for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove
values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog task.
Coating Color - Select the color of the equipment coating. To add, edit, or remove values that
are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Area - Displays the area of the exterior coating.

Position and Orientation


East - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system origin in
the east direction.
North - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system origin in
the north direction.
Elevation - Displays the distance of the connection point above or below the active coordinate
system origin.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 47


Place Equipment

Bearing - Displays the bearing angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object
to the X-axis of its local coordinate system. The local X-axis is the default axis of primary
symmetry for all symbols in the catalog. This option sets the reference in the model to the active
coordinate system North axis. The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from the active
coordinate system north looking in the negative active coordinate system direction. That is,
down from 0 to 360 degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the bearing measure displays 0 degrees.
Pitch - Displays the pitch angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
X-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
the intersection of the vertical plane through the X-axis of the local coordinate system and the
active coordinate system horizontal plane. The angle is measured in the positive direction from
the horizontal plane in the active coordinate system up direction regardless of the current
bearing. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and +90 degrees with 0 indicating
horizontal.
Roll - Displays the roll angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
Y-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
perpendicular to the local coordinate system x axis and in the horizontal plane. Roll angles are
measured clockwise from horizontal to the y-axis of the local coordinate system. The roll angle
is between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the reference in the model is the North axis.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the equipment object.
To add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing on the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45)

48 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Equipment

Select Insulation Material Dialog Box


Specifies any one of the insulation materials listed for a selected equipment object. This dialog
box appears when you click in the Material field for the Insulation and Tracing category on the
Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. By browsing through the part hierarchy, you can
find and select an insulation material in the Catalog database. After you select a material and
click OK, the software returns you immediately to the Occurrence tab, where you can specify
the thickness of the insulation.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected insulation material folder. Use this command
to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific insulation material you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected insulation material folder that you moved away
from by using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the
specific insulation material you need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the hierarchy. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific material you need.
Properties - Displays the properties of the selected object. Because you cannot modify any
properties until the equipment is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are
read-only.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be
assigned to the object in the catalog reference data.
List View - Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a spreadsheet-style
grid view.
Address - Sets the current location within the hierarchy of available insulation materials. The
dropdown box lists the folders you have visited.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56)
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 45)

Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the part information for the equipment object, the properties and their values, as
defined in the reference data. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
properties for the selected objects display on the tab. For more information about the information
defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide
available from Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category - Select the properties to review. Equipment information is divided into several
different categories like Standard, Equipment Specification, Equipment Support, Nozzle
Length, and Equipment Dimensions.
Not all categories are available for all equipment objects.
Property - Displays the name of the property. The properties that appear are dependent on the
equipment type selected. For example, the properties displayed for an equipment object based
on a pump are different from those based on a cooler. For more information on equipment part
properties, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available with the Help >
Printable Guides command within the Equipment and Furnishings task.
Value - Displays the value of the corresponding property.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 49


Place Equipment

Insulation Tab
Displays insulation properties that have been defined for the selected equipment.
Insulation Specification - Specifies whether or not the selected equipment object is insulated.
The options on this dialog box remain disabled unless User Defined is selected from the
dropdown list.
Purpose - Specifies the insulation purpose for the selected equipment object.
Material - Displays the Select Insulation Material Dialog Box (on page 49) from which you may
specify an insulation material.
Thickness - Defines the thickness of the specified insulation material. This option remains
disabled until a material is selected from the Select Insulation Material dialog box. By default,
the smallest thickness value of the selected material is displayed. An alternative value may be
selected from the dropdown list.
See Also
Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 56)
Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45)

50 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 5

Place Designed Equipment


Places equipment types that have been defined in the reference data. The properties of the
equipment type you select are inherited by the designed equipment part. With the Place
Designed Equipment command, you can define an equipment type, a system parent, name,
and other property values as appropriate for the equipment type. Equipment position and
orientation is further defined by mating, aligning, or connecting equipment graphics to reference
graphics in the workspace, or by moving or rotating the equipment.
The goal of the software's designed equipment component modeling capabilities is to allow you
to build an equipment definition in the Model database by combining basic shapes, ports
(nozzle, foundation, electrical, and so forth) and properties defined in the reference data.
Designed equipment objects can be built entirely out of primitive geometric shapes, designed
equipment components, or an existing equipment component part can be placed from the
catalog to enhance the designed equipment object. For example, you can use the Place
Designed Equipment command to create a designed equipment object in the model, add
an agitator (using the Place Shape command), and then add nozzle primitives (using the
Place Nozzle command) to customize the designed equipment. You can also place a nozzle
using a nozzle defined in the P&ID design basis (if P&ID design basis data is available).
Some equipment shapes can be modeled more easily using solid modeling software. In addition
to using the primitive shapes delivered with the software, you can import graphics from a SAT
file as the geometry for the designed equipment shape. After the geometry is defined, you can
then place ports to define distributed connections to the designed equipment.
As a further enhancement, the software provides a prismatic shape feature so that you can
design uniquely customized shapes in the model. The place prismatic shape feature is made up
of two distinct processes:
 Define a path.
 Define a cross section, or profile, to project along the path.
The ultimate goal of these two processes is placement of a shape in the model as part of a
designed equipment object.
After a path and cross-section have been defined, the cross- section is then projected along the
path to create a shape with the same properties as other equipment shapes.
The place prismatic shape feature is available on the Occurrence tab of the Shape
Properties dialog box.
When you create a designed equipment object and add an equipment component object or
shape, the default surface on the equipment component object or shape (as defined in Visual
Basic) is automatically used to establish a mate or align relationship to the other surface or
reference element you select during initial placement. When modifying a shape to create a new
mate or align relationship, the default surface is not automatically used. You must interactively
select the surface. For example, you might define the bottom of a pump as the default surface
so that the software mates that surface to the floor. If the software cannot find a suitable mating
surface for the equipment, the equipment object is placed in free space, pending additional
design of the structures or other reference elements.
When creating a designed equipment object, you can provide an optional offset distance from
the surface. The default offset distance for any new piece of equipment is zero or the last offset
used in the current session. The software maintains the offset relationship between the default

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 51


Place Designed Equipment

surface and the surface or reference element in the workspace in the event of any changes to
their position (for example, if a slab is lowered, then the equipment follows the slab, maintaining
the offset). You can further define the equipment orientation by mating, aligning, or connecting
equipment to other objects in the model, or by moving or rotating the designed equipment. For
more information on positioning relationships, see Positioning Relationships.

Place Designed Equipment Ribbon


Sets options for adding designed equipment to your model. This ribbon appears automatically
after you select the Place Designed Equipment command and then select an equipment
type. Until a shape has been added to the designed equipment, only the Equipment
Properties, Equipment Name, and Active System controls are available.

 To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read
the ToolTip.
 To add a shape to the designed equipment and enable the remaining ribbon controls, select
Place Shape .
Equipment Properties - Edits the occurrence properties and review the static properties of
an existing piece of equipment. Equipment properties can be edited only after the designed
equipment is placed in the model.

User Defined Form Definition – Displays User Defined Form for the particular
equipment if it is defined in the catalog. See the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data
Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Relationship List - Lists all relationships for the selected designed equipment and provides an
option for creating a new relationship if the equipment is not already fully constrained. An
equipment object is fully constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to prevent
movement or rotation of the object along all three coordinate axes. This control is only available
after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Positioning Relationships - Displays the available options for types of positioning
relationships: Mate, Align, Connect Minimum Distance, Mate to Tangent Plane, and Parallel.
Some options may not be available for all designed equipment types. See Positioning
Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship - Removes the selected relationship from the equipment model and the
database. Using the Relationships List box, select a previously existing relationship for the
designed equipment, and click Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when
modifying existing designed equipment. This control is available only after a shape has been
added to the designed equipment.
Equipment Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the designed equipment to be
placed that will be affected by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in
this step moves to create the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference
step remains fixed.
Second Part Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the equipment object or
reference element already in the model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After
you select the reference, the software repositions the first designed equipment object chosen
with respect to the second object selected in the definition of the relationship. This control is
available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Offset - Defines the offset distance for a mate or align relationship. Offsets are disabled when
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial equipment placement if
needed. This control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.

52 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Designed Equipment

Name - Displays the designed equipment name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and
accepts changes to that name.
System - Specifies the system with which to associate the selected equipment. The default
system is the Plant itself.

Select Equipment Type Dialog Box


Selects the type of designed equipment to be created. This dialog box appears automatically
when you click the Place Designed Equipment command. By browsing through the part
hierarchy, you can find any piece of equipment in the Catalog database. The resulting designed
equipment inherits the properties of the existing equipment type you select from the dialog box.
After you select an equipment type and click OK, the Properties dialog box appears so you can
set properties for the new equipment. After you click OK on the Properties dialog box, the
software returns you to the model so you can finish placing the object.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected equipment type or node. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific type you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected equipment type or node that you moved away from
by using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the
specific type you need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the Equipment catalog hierarchy. Use
this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific type you need.
Properties - Displays the properties of the selected object. Because you cannot modify any
properties until the equipment is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are
read-only.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be
assigned to the equipment in the catalog reference data.
List View - Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address - Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.

What do you want to do?


 Place designed equipment (on page 54)
 Set positioning relationships for designed equipment (on page 54)
 Edit designed equipment properties (on page 55)
 Edit designed equipment reference coordinate system (on page 55)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 53


Place Designed Equipment

Place designed equipment


1. Click Place Designed Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment Type dialog box appears.
2. Select the designed equipment type to create.
The Select Equipment Type dialog box displays the existing equipment
classifications as defined in the Catalog database. The resulting designed equipment object
inherits the properties of the equipment type you select.
3. Click OK. A definition of the new designed equipment object is created in the Model
database and appears in the system hierarchy in the Workplace Explorer.
The Designed Equipment Properties dialog box appears.
4. Edit the designed equipment properties as needed, and click OK.
The software returns you to the model to complete the placement of the designed
equipment.
5. Place a data point in the model to define the origin of the equipment.
You can press the down arrow key to scroll to each data point in the equipment.
6. If necessary, use the Place Designed Equipment ribbon to do the following:
 Select a system with which to associate the new designed equipment object from the
options in the System box.
 Type a name for the new designed equipment object in the Name box.
Although the new designed equipment object is added to the Workspace Explorer,
you must use Place Shape (on page 63) to create geometry for the object.

Set positioning relationships for designed equipment


1. Select the designed equipment object for which to define a relationship.
2. In the Relationships List box on the Place Designed Equipment ribbon, choose <New
Relationship>.
3. Select one of the available positioning relationships in the Positioning Relationships List
box, and follow the on-screen prompts. For more information, see Positioning Relationships.
Depending on the type of positioning relationship defined in the previous step,
surfaces or points need to be defined to finish configuring the relationship.

54 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Designed Equipment

Edit designed equipment properties


1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Equipment, and then select an
equipment object.

 If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select on the
vertical toolbar.
 To edit the properties of a designed equipment object for which geometry has yet to be
defined, you must select the object from the system hierarchy in the Workspace
Explorer.
2. Click Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
The Properties dialog box appears.
You can also access the Properties dialog box by selecting Properties from the Edit
menu, or by right-clicking an equipment object and choosing Properties from the short-cut
menu.
3. Access the appropriate dialog box tabs and modify the properties as needed.
4. Click OK to save your changes, and return to the workspace.
You can also select Apply to put the changes into effect and continue working in the
Properties dialog box.

 Occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or editing
different types of properties, refer to the SmartPlant Layout Reference Data Guide
accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 If more than one piece of equipment is selected, the Occurrence tab displays only the
common occurrence properties of the items.
 The Definition, Connections, Weight & CG, and Relationship tabs are read-only. The
properties and values displayed on these tabs are defined in the reference data. For more
information, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide accessible from the
Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 If the equipment model was created using Solid Edge, then any changes that would affect
the shape or size of the equipment model require that you have Solid Edge running on your
computer.

Edit designed equipment reference coordinate


system
1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Equipment, and then select a
designed equipment object.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select on the
vertical toolbar.
2. Right-click the selected equipment object, and click Reference coordinate system.
3. Use the Move command to move the reference coordinate system.
The control point of the designed equipment moves with the reference coordinate system.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 55


Place Designed Equipment

Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box


Displays designed equipment properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56)
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 49)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Notes Tab (on page 197)

Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog


Box)
Displays all the editable instance-specific information about the selected designed equipment
object. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property
value appears on the right side of the grid. If more than one equipment object is selected,
common occurrence properties for the selected objects appear on the tab.
When viewing properties for a single equipment object, the following properties appear. More
properties may appear depending on what you defined in the reference data. For more
information about occurrences defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and
Furnishings Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Because equipment properties are customizable in the equipment and furnishings
reference data, only the properties that are required by the software are documented.
Display Equipment Preview - This button is disabled for designed equipment.
Category - Select the properties to view, modify, or define. Equipment properties are divided
into several different categories: Standard, Insulation and Tracing, Weight and CG, Fabrication
and Construction, Surface Treatment and Coating, Position and Orientation, and Responsibility.

Standard
Name - Displays the name of the equipment object. The equipment name is based on the Name
Rule selection. If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User
Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to use to name the equipment object. You can select one
of the listed rules or select User Defined to specify the equipment name yourself in the Name
box.
Description - Enter a description for the equipment object.
System - Select the system to which the equipment belongs. By default, the model is the parent
system for equipment objects.
Reporting Requirements - Displays the reporting requirement for the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Reporting Type select list in
the Catalog task.
Reporting Type - Displays the type of reporting. To add, edit, or remove values that are
available for selection, edit the Reporting Type select list in the Catalog task.
Correlation Status - Displays whether or not the equipment object has been correlated to an
equipment object in a P&ID.

56 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Designed Equipment

Correlation Basis - Specifies if the equipment object is correlated to a P&ID equipment object.
Select Correlate Object if the equipment has a correlating equipment object in a P&ID. Select
No correlation is required if the equipment object does not have a correlating equipment
object in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the equipment object is approved with discrepancies
in the three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the equipment object topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and
Topology mismatches approved if the equipment object data and topology mismatches can
be ignored. Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Is Insulated - Specifies whether the equipment object is insulated.
Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use
the insulation defined by the equipment object, this field cannot be changed. However, if
Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation thickness from those allowed
for the material in the reference data.
Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, the information in this box cannot be changed.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the purpose of the insulation in
this box. Available purposes are read from the reference data.
Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, this field cannot be changed. However, if Insulation
Specification is manually defined, select the insulation material from those available from the
reference data.
Operating Temperature - Displays the operating temperature.
Insulation Surface Area - Displays the measurement of the surface area of insulation.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether the equipment is heat-traced. To add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium sheet in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the reference data.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. To add, edit, or remove values that are
available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. To add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the
Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the unit of measurement of temperature, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius
for example, when specifying this value.

Weight & CG
Dry Weight - Displays the dry weight of the equipment object.
Wet Weight - Displays the wet weight of the equipment object.
Dry CGX - Displays the X-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CGY - Displays the Y-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CGZ - Displays the Z-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Wet CGX - Displays the X-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CGY - Displays the Y-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CGZ - Displays the Z-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 57


Place Designed Equipment

Fabrication and Construction


Fabrication Requirement - Select the fabrication requirement for the equipment. To add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Fabrication Type - Select the type of fabrication for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove
values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the Catalog task.
Construction Requirement - Select the construction requirement for the equipment. To add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in
the Catalog task.
Construction Type - Select the type of construction for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove
values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in the Catalog task.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Coating Requirement - Select the coating requirement for the equipment. To add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Coating Type - Select the type of coating for the equipment. To add, edit, or remove values that
are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog task.
Coating Color - Select the color of the equipment coating. To add, edit, or remove values that
are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Position and Orientation


East - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system origin in
the east direction.
North - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system origin in
the north direction.
Elevation - Displays the distance of the connection point above or below the active coordinate
system origin.
Bearing - Displays the bearing angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object
to the X-axis of its local coordinate system. The local X-axis is the default axis of primary
symmetry for all symbols in the catalog. This option sets the reference in the model to the active
coordinate system North axis. The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from the active
coordinate system north looking in the negative active coordinate system direction. That is,
down from 0 to 360 degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the bearing measure displays 0 degrees.
Pitch - Displays the pitch angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
X-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
the intersection of the vertical plane through the X-axis of the local coordinate system and the
active coordinate system horizontal plane. The angle is measured in the positive direction from
the horizontal plane in the active coordinate system up direction regardless of the current
bearing. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and +90 degrees with 0 indicating
horizontal.

58 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Designed Equipment

Roll - Displays the roll angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
Y-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
perpendicular to the local coordinate system x axis and in the horizontal plane. Roll angles are
measured clockwise from horizontal to the y-axis of the local coordinate system. The roll angle
is between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the reference in the model is the North axis.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the equipment object.
To add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing on the equipment object. To
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 56)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 59


Place Designed Equipment

Select Insulation Material Dialog Box


Specifies any one of the insulation materials listed for a selected equipment object. This dialog
box appears when you click in the Material field for the Insulation and Tracing category on the
Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. By browsing through the part hierarchy, you can
find and select an insulation material in the Catalog database. After you select a material and
click OK, the software returns you immediately to the Occurrence tab, where you can specify
the thickness of the insulation.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected insulation material folder. Use this command
to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific insulation material you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected insulation material folder that you moved away
from by using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the
specific insulation material you need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the hierarchy. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific material you need.
Properties - Displays the properties of the selected object. Because you cannot modify any
properties until the equipment is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are
read-only.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be
assigned to the object in the catalog reference data.
List View - Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a spreadsheet-style
grid view.
Address - Sets the current location within the hierarchy of available insulation materials. The
dropdown box lists the folders you have visited.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 56)
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 45)

Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the part information for the equipment object, the properties and their values, as
defined in the reference data. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
properties for the selected objects display on the tab. For more information about the information
defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide
available from Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category - Select the properties to review. Equipment information is divided into several
different categories like Standard, Equipment Specification, Equipment Support, Nozzle
Length, and Equipment Dimensions.
Not all categories are available for all equipment objects.
Property - Displays the name of the property. The properties that appear are dependent on the
equipment type selected. For example, the properties displayed for an equipment object based
on a pump are different from those based on a cooler. For more information on equipment part
properties, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available with the Help >
Printable Guides command within the Equipment and Furnishings task.
Value - Displays the value of the corresponding property.

60 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Designed Equipment

Insulation Tab
Displays insulation properties that have been defined for the selected equipment.
Insulation Specification - Specifies whether or not the selected equipment object is insulated.
The options on this dialog box remain disabled unless User Defined is selected from the
dropdown list.
Purpose - Specifies the insulation purpose for the selected equipment object.
Material - Displays the Select Insulation Material Dialog Box (on page 49) from which you may
specify an insulation material.
Thickness - Defines the thickness of the specified insulation material. This option remains
disabled until a material is selected from the Select Insulation Material dialog box. By default,
the smallest thickness value of the selected material is displayed. An alternative value may be
selected from the dropdown list.
See Also
Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 56)
Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 45)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 61


Place Designed Equipment

62 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 6

Place Shape
Adds additional shapes to an existing equipment or equipment component type. The Place
Shape command uses the equipment or equipment component object selected in the
Workspace Explorer hierarchy. If no equipment or equipment component object is selected
prior to starting the command, you are prompted to select an equipment or equipment
component object.
If you click and hold the button on the vertical toolbar, the Place Shape flyout appears so you
can select a different type of shape to place.

Click More to display the Select Shape dialog box and select a shape from those available in
the Catalog database.

Place Shape Ribbon


Sets options for positioning the specific shape as part of a selected designed equipment object.
Relationship List - Shows the relationship currently applied to the shape and allows you to
change or add new relationship as needed.
Positioning Relationship - Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships:
Mate, Align, and Connect. Some options may not be available for all shape types. For more
information, see Positioning Relationships.
Delete Relationship - Removes the selected relationship from the model. Using the
Relationships List box, select a previously existing relationship for the shape, and click Delete
Relationship. You can use this command only when modifying existing shapes. This control is
available only after a shape has been added to the equipment or equipment component.
Shape Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the shape to be placed that will be
affected by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to
create the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step remains fixed.
Second Part Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the shape object already in the
model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After you select the reference, the
software repositions the first shape chosen with respect to the second part selected in the
definition of the relationship.
Offset - Defines the offset distance for a mate or align relationship. Offsets are disabled when
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial equipment placement if
needed. This control is only available after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 63


Place Shape

Name - Displays the shape name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts
changes to that name.

 If the name of the parent equipment changes, the software automatically updates the name
of the shape to reflect that change. For example, if the name of the parent item changes
from Pump01 to Pump100, the shape's name could change from Pump01-Shape-001 to
Pump100-Shape-001.
 Some properties for the shape may be read-only on the Place Shape ribbon depending on
the type of shape you selected.
Equipment - Specifies the equipment or equipment component object with which to associate
the selected shape.
Add Shape/Subtract Shape/Suppress Shape - Defines how the shape is used for a designed
solid. This option is only available when you are placing or editing a shape in a parent designed
solid.
Add Shape - Select to have the shape add its material to the parent designed solid.
Subtract Shape - Select to have the shape subtract its material from the parent designed
solid.
Suppress Shape - Select to have the shape added to the parent designed solid in the
hierarchy, but have the shape's material ignored (neither added to nor subtracted from the
parent designed solid.) Use this option to temporarily remove a shape's effect on the parent
designed solid, but not remove the shape from the designed solid entirely. You can use
suppressed shapes as construction graphics for the placement of other shapes in the designed
solid.

Select Shape Dialog Box


Specifies a shape to place on an equipment or equipment object. The dialog box appears
automatically when you click More in the Shape floating palette. By browsing through the
shapes hierarchy, you can find any shape that exists in the Catalog database. After you select a
shape, the Shape Properties dialog box appears so you can define shape properties. When
you click OK on the Shape Properties dialog box, the software returns you to the graphic
window so you can place the shape.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected shape type or node. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific shape you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected shape type or node that you moved away from by
using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific
shape you need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the Shapes catalog hierarchy. Use this
command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific shape you need.
Properties - Displays the properties of the selected shape. Because you cannot modify any
properties until the shape is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are read-only.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected shape. The image file must be assigned
to the shape in the catalog reference data.
List View -Sets the dialog box to display shapes in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display shapes in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address - Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.

64 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Shape

What do you want to do?


 Place a shape (on page 65)
 Edit shape properties (on page 65)
 Edit prismatic shape properties (on page 66)

Place a shape
1. Click Place Shape on the vertical toolbar, and hold down a few seconds to display the
floating Shapes palette. Select the shape to place from the Shapes dialog box. The icon of
the last used shape displays on the toolbar.
If an equipment or an equipment component object has not been selected, you are
prompted to select one. Do this either in a graphic view or in the system hierarchy in the
Workspace Explorer.
2. If necessary, make adjustments on the Shape Properties dialog box, and click OK.
3. Click in the graphic view to select an approximate location or reference element for a
relationship for the shape.

 You can continue using the Place Shape command to combine geometric shapes and
create customized equipment or equipment component objects.
 After a shape has been placed in the model as part of the equipment or equipment
component object, you can use the horizontal ribbon to add or change the positioning
relationship.
 Press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the shape by 90-degree increments at any time
during the placement of the shape. Press the up arrow to scroll through the three possible
axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.

Edit shape properties


1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a shape in the
graphic window.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Shape Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
You can also access the Shape Properties dialog box by selecting Properties from
the Edit menu, or by right-clicking the shape and choosing Properties from the short- cut
menu.
3. On the Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 67), modify the geometric
dimensions of the shape.
4. Access the other dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 65


Place Shape

5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the workspace.


You can also select Apply to put the changes into effect and continue working in the
Properties dialog box.

 Each geometric shape object has its own Properties dialog box that displays its
corresponding parameters, including any reference graphics that illustrate what the
dimensional parameters represent.
 All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or editing
different types of properties, refer to the SmartPlant Layout Reference Data User's Guide
accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command.

Edit prismatic shape properties


1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click the Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
You can also access the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box from the
Relationship tab on the Designed Equipment Properties dialog box. Select the name of
the prismatic shape to edit, and click Go To.
3. On the Occurrence tab, modify the display aspect or the name of the prismatic shape.
4. On the Cross-Section tab, modify the geometric dimensions of the existing cross-section,
or select a new cross-section and enter new property information.
5. Access the other dialog box tabs and modify the properties as needed.
6. Click OK to save your changes and return to the workspace.
You can also select Apply to put the changes into effect and continue working in the
Properties dialog box.

 Each geometric shape object has its own Properties dialog box that displays its
corresponding parameters, including any reference graphics that illustrate what the
dimensional parameters represent.
 All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or editing
different types of properties, refer to the SmartPlant Layout Reference Data User's Guide
accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

66 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Shape

Shape Properties Dialog Box


Displays shape properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 67)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Notes Tab (on page 197)

Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box)


Sets properties for the unique instance of the selected shape. Shapes can be placed either from
what has been defined in the reference data, or by importing a geometric shape contained within
a SAT file.
Category - Displays the defined category name for the selected designed equipment. This data
is retrieved from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Display Aspect - Displays the Display Aspect dialog which lists all the display aspects that
may be applied to the selected shape.
Property - Lists all the dimensional properties of the selected shape. You can add or modify
these properties through the catalog reference data. The properties available change depending
on the type of shape selected.
Value - Shows the current values for all properties of the selected shape. You can modify these
values to reflect exact design needs or deviations from the standard part.
Name - Specifies the name for the selected shape. The shape name is based on the Name
Rule selection. If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User
Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to use to name this shape. You can select one of the
listed rules or select User Defined to specify the shape name yourself in the Name box.

Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box


Displays prismatic shape properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 68)
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 68)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Notes Tab (on page 197)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 67


Place Shape

Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box)


Sets properties for the unique instance of the selected prismatic shape. Prismatic shapes can be
placed in the model by selecting PrismaticShape in the Shapes dropdown list on the
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 67).
Category - Displays the defined category name for the selected prismatic shape. This data is
retrieved from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Shape - Displays the PrismaticShape icon. This option is read-only when you access the tab to
edit a prismatic shape that has already been placed in the model.
Display Aspect -Lists all the display aspects that may be applied to the selected shape.
Name - Displays the name defined for the selected prismatic shape during its initial placement in
the model.

Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box)


Displays information about the cross-section for a prismatic shape that was projected along a
path.
Cross Section - Specifies the type of cross-section for the prismatic shape. You can either
select a standard cross-section defined in the reference data or select Sketch to draw your own
cross-section.
When any standard cross-section type is selected in the Cross Section list, you can modify the
properties that are described later in this topic. When Sketch is selected in the Cross Section
list, you can view options, such as each point, its X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates in the model, and its
turn type, but you cannot modify them. For more information, see General Tab (Sketch
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86).
Display Cross Section Image - Displays the image associated with the standard
cross-section type in the reference data.
Cross-section images show the dimensions that you can define for the cross-section type, the
default cardinal points for the cross-section type, and the angle for the cross-section. For
example, the following graphic contains the dimensions and cardinal point for a standard road
cross-section:

If no image is associated with the cross-section and the selected cardinal point, Image Not
Available appears at the bottom of the tab.
A - G - Defines the dimensions for standard cross-sections. If an image is defined for the
cross-section in the reference data, you can see what each letter represents by clicking Display
Cross Section Image .
Cardinality - Defines the point where the software attaches the cross-section to the path. If you
click Display Cross-Section Image to see a graphic of the cross-section, you can view
where each cardinal point is located by selecting each cardinal point in the list. The software
automatically updates the display, if the appropriate graphic is available, with a graphic
containing the selected cardinal point.

68 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Shape

You can select User Defined cardinal points to specify a reference point on selected cross
section for precise placement.
If you have upgraded the database from version 2009.1 to 2011, then you must do the
following to use cardinal points:
1. Bulkload the following spreadsheet: [Product
Folder]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\AdditionalDataFiles\Delta2009.1to2011\1_AMD_Delta_2009.
1_2011_Shapes.xls.
2. Run Tools > Synchronize Model with Catalog in Project Management.
This should not result in a large update to the model, because only impacted cross-section
symbols are updated.
Angle - Defines the angle by which the cross-section is rotated about the path.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 69


Place Shape

70 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 7

Creating Customized Shapes


In the Equipment and Furnishings task, you can create customized shapes in the location that
you need using the place prismatic shape feature. This feature is especially useful for designed
equipment objects that need to have an unusual shape.
When you place a prismatic shape, a two-dimensional cross-section is projected along a path
that you specify in the model to create the shape. The path determines the actual location of the
shape in the model. The cross-section, on the other hand, defines the shape and its dimensions.

Defining Paths
When you define the path along which the cross-section will be projected, you can choose from
straight lines or arcs. You can also control all aspects of the path by specifying the types of turns
that you need, the dimensions of the turns, and the plane for the path.

Defining Cross-sections
When you define the cross-section for the shape, you can select from a standard set of
cross-sections, defined in the reference data, or you can sketch your own two-dimensional
cross-section.
When you use a standard cross-sectional type, you can change the dimensions and the cardinal
point of the cross-section on the Cross-Section tab of the Shape Properties or Prismatic
Shape Properties dialog box. The cardinal point of the cross-section is important in determining
the shape and location of the resulting volume. The cardinal point is the point where the
software attaches the cross-section to the path. All standard cross-section types have various
cardinal points from which you can choose.
For example, in the following graphic, you can see that the cardinal point is located in the center
of the road cross-section. If the cardinal point were moved to another location, the actual path of
the roadway would be different.

When you sketch a cross-section, you must sketch the cross-section on the two-dimensional
plane that is orthogonal to the first leg of the path. The software displays this plane, which is
perpendicular to the path, as you sketch the cross-section. The cardinal point is defined as you
sketch. In other words, the cross-section surrounds the path and is attached to the path exactly
as you sketch it.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 71


Creating Customized Shapes

Place Prismatic Shape Ribbon


Sets options for placing shapes defined by a path and the cross-section projected along the
path.
Shape Properties - Displays the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, on which you can
set properties for the shape that you need to place.
Path - Displays the Create Path ribbon (on page 73), which defines the path along which the
cross-section is projected.
Cross-Section - Sets properties for the cross-section. If one of the standard cross-section
types is selected in the Cross-Section Type box, this button is unavailable. If you select Sketch
as the cross-section type, this button displays the Create Path ribbon (on page 73) to allow you
to sketch the two-dimensional cross-section. The Cross-Section button is only available after
you define a path for the volume or when you select User Defined for Cardinality.
Finish - Places the shape along the path specified with the specified cross-section.
Cross-Section Type -Specifies the type of cross-section to project along the specified path.
You can either select a standard cross-section defined in the reference data, or you can sketch
your own custom cross-section.
Relationship List - Lists all relationships for the selected shape and provides an option for
creating a new relationship if the object is not already fully constrained. An object is fully
constrained when it has sufficiently defined relationships to prevent movement or rotation of the
object along all three coordinate axes.
Positioning Relationships - Displays the available options for types of positioning
relationships: Mate, Align, and Connect. Some options may not be available for all shape types.
See Positioning Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship - Removes the selected relationship from the model. Using the
Relationships List box, select a previously existing relationship for the shape, and click Delete
Relationship. You can use this command only when modifying existing designed equipment.
This control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Shape Reference - Prompts you for the face of the shape to be placed that will be affected
by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to create
the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step remains fixed. This
control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Second Part Reference - Prompts you for the reference on the shape object already in the
model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After you select the reference, the
software repositions the first shape part chosen with respect to the second part selected in the
definition of the relationship.
Offset - Defines the offset distance for a mate or align relationship. Offsets are disabled when
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial placement if needed.
This control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Name - Displays the shape name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts
changes to that name.
Equipment - Specifies the designed equipment object with which to associate the selected
shape.
See Also
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 71)
Place a Prismatic Shape (on page 78)
Create Path Ribbon (on page 73)

72 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

Create Path Ribbon


Sets options for defining a new path.
Sketch Properties - Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 86), in which you
can view properties for the path.
Finish Path - Displays the path in the active view and returns to the model with the place
prismatic shape feature still enabled.
Cancel - Cancels the changes you made and returns you to the model.
Edit - Modifies and moves the existing path. When you initially create a path, this option is
available only after you place at least two points in the path. You can select the segment, turn,
or multiple segments to which to make modifications.
Origin - Defines the origin on the cross-section for prismatic shape construction.
Create - Sketches the path or add segments to an existing path.
Reference Point - Specifies that you are currently defining the first point of the path segment.
End Point (Straight Line) - Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of a
straight path segment.
End Point (Arc) - Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of an arc. This
option appears only when Arc is selected in the Line Type list.
Third Point (Arc) - Specifies that you are defining the final point of an arc.
Path Type - Specifies the type of line for the current segment in the path. To change the
segment type, click a new type in the Line Type list.

Line Type Options


Line - Defines the line type for the segment to be a straight line.
Arc by 3 Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc. To define the arc, you
must click three points in the view.
No Line - Specifies that you do not want the current segment of the path to have a line
associated with it.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path.

Working Plane Options


Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane.
Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane.
Section Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane.
Plane by Turn - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn. You
select the turn to set the plane.
Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to
any plane.
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle box. Locking the corresponding angle value
creates a constraint along which the selected turn angle can be moved.
Angle -Specifies the angle for the turn.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 73


Creating Customized Shapes

Lock Length - Locks or unlocks the Length box.


Length -Specifies the length of the selected path segment.
Turn Type -Specifies the type of turn associated with the current path segment. The Turn Type
option is unavailable if you select Arc or No Line in the Line Type list.

Turn Type Options


None - Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
Bend - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify the angle
of the bend in the Feature Value box.
Cornice - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can specify the
radius of the cornice in the Feature Value box.
The following graphic includes an example of each of the available turn types:

Turn Type Value -Defines dimensions for the selected turn type.
See Also
Sketch Properties Dialog Box (on page 86)
Place a Prismatic Shape (on page 78)
Define the Path for a Prismatic Shape (on page 78)
Sketch the Cross-section for a Prismatic Shape (on page 79)

Edit Path Straight Segment Ribbon


Sets options for modifying a straight segment of an existing path.
Sketch Properties - Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 86), on which you
can view properties for the path.
Finish Path - Displays the path in the active view and returns to the model with the place
prismatic shape feature still enabled.
Cancel- Cancels the changes you made and returns you to the model.
Edit - Modifies and moves the existing path. You can select the segment, turn, or multiple
segments to which to make modifications.
Create - Displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin - Defines the origin on the cross-section for prismatic shape construction.
Reference Point - Specifies that you are selecting the starting location of the move vector.
End Point - Specifies that you are selecting the ending location of the move vector.

74 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

Path Type - Specifies the type of line for the current segment in the path. To change the
segment type, click a new type in the Line Type list.

Path Type Options


Line - Defines the line type for the segment to be a straight line.
Arc by 3 Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc. To define the arc, you
must click three points in the view.
No Line - Specifies that you do not want the current segment of the path to have a line
associated with it.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path.

Working Plane Options


Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane.
Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane.
Section Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane.
Plane by Turn - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn. You
select the turn to set the plane.
Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to
any plane.
Delete Selected Items - Deletes the selected path segments.
Length Locked - Defines whether or not the length of the selected segment should remain
constant while moving.
When locked , the software automatically modifies the turn points, along with the length and
angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved segment. The length of the
moved segment does not change.
When not locked , the software extends or shortens the associated segments to connect with
the new position of the moved segment. The length of the moved segment can change.
See Also
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 71)
Modify a Sketched Cross-Section (on page 81)
Modify a Straight Segment in a Path (on page 84)
Modify a Turn in a Path (on page 85)

Edit Path Arc Ribbon


Sets options for modifying an arc that is part of an existing path.
Sketch Properties - Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 86), on which you
can view properties for the path.
Finish Path - Displays the path in the active view and returns to the model with the place
prismatic shape feature still enabled.
Cancel - Cancels the changes you made and returns you to the model.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 75


Creating Customized Shapes

Edit - Modifies and moves the existing path. You can select the segment, turn, or multiple
segments to which to make modifications.
Create - Displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin - Defines the origin on the cross-section for prismatic shape construction.
Reference Point - Specifies that you are selecting the starting location of the move vector.
End Point - Specifies that you are selecting the ending location of the move vector.
Path Type - Specifies the type of line for the current segment in the path. To change the
segment type, click a new type in the Line Type list.

Path Type Options


Line - Defines the line type for the segment to be a straight line.
Arc by 3 Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc. To define the arc, you
must click three points in the view.
No Line - Specifies that you do not want the current segment of the path to have a line
associated with it.

Working Plane Options


Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane.
Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane.
Section Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane.
Plane by Turn - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn. You
select the turn to set the plane.
Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to
any plane.
Delete Selected Items - Deletes the selected path segments.
See Also
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 71)
Modify an Arc in a Path (on page 85)
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 71)

Edit Path Turn Ribbon


Sets options for modifying a turn in an existing path.
Sketch Properties - Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 86), on which you
can view properties for the path.
Finish Path - Displays the path in the active view and returns to the model with the place
prismatic shape feature still enabled.
Cancel - Cancels the changes you made and returns you to the model.
Edit - Modifies and moves the existing path. You can select the segment, turn, or multiple
segments to which to make modifications.
Create - Displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin - Defines the origin on the cross-section for prismatic shape construction.
Reference Point - Specifies that you are selecting the starting location of the move vector.

76 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

End Point - Specifies that you are selecting the ending location of the move vector.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path.

Working Plane Options


Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane.
Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane.
Section Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane.
Plane by Turn - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn. You
select the turn to set the plane.
Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to
any plane.
Delete Selected Items - Deletes the selected path segments.
Angle 1 - Displays the first angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.
Angle 2 - Displays the second angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.
Angle 3 - Displays the third angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.
Turn Type -Specifies the type of turn. You can change the turn type by selecting another type in
the list.

Turn Type Options


None - Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
Bend - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify the angle
of the bend in the Feature Value box.
Cornice - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can specify the
radius of the cornice in the Feature Value box.
Chamfer - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a chamfer. You can specify the
dimensions for setback A and setback B of the chamfer in the Feature Value box. The
dimensions of setback A and setback B for the chamfer must be the same.
The following graphic includes an example of each of the available turn types:

Turn Type Value -Defines dimensions for the selected turn type.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 77


Creating Customized Shapes

Place a prismatic shape


1. Click Place Shape on the vertical toolbar.
If a designed equipment object has not been selected, select one in a graphic view or
in the Workspace Explorer.
2. On the Shapes dialog box, select the shape to place.
You can also click More on the dialog box to select a shape from the catalog browser.
3. Click Display Aspect and select the aspects from the list.
You can click Format > View and change the Render Selected Aspects option in the
Format View dialog box to display the aspect in the active graphic view.
4. Specify a name for the new shape in the Name box.
5. On the Cross-Section tab, select a cross-section in the drop-down list. A corresponding
image of the selected cross-section appears at the bottom of the dialog box.
6. In the Value column, enter the appropriate geometric dimensions, cardinal point, and angle.
7. Click OK to return to the model.
8. Define the path for the shape. For more information, see Define the Path for a Prismatic
Shape (on page 78).
9. Click Finish Path to finish the path.
10. Click Finish to place the new shape and save it to the database.
11. If necessary, add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Positioning
Relationships list.

Define the path for a prismatic shape


1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click the Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, click Path .
3. Click Create on the ribbon.
4. Click the first point for the path.

 You can use the PinPoint or Point Along commands, and the SmartSketch relationship
indicators when defining your path.
 You can change the plane for the path at any time by selecting the plane in the Plane
list.
 To change the segment from a straight line to an arc, click Arc by 3 Points in the
Path Type list, and then click three points to define the arc.
 To switch back to a straight line after sketching an arc, click Line in the Path Type
list.
 To break the path, click No Line in the Path Type list.

78 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

5. Click the second point for the path.


To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list and
define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Turn Type Value box.
The following graphic shows examples of the available turn types:

6. Click to place other segments of the path as needed.


7. After you place all the points that define the path, click Finish Path.

 The software does not require that you close the path. When creating a continuous path,
you can end it at any point.
 After you place a segment of the path by defining two points, you can click Edit on the
ribbon to change the segment.

Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic shape


1. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, select Sketch in the Cross-Section list.
2. Click Cross-Section .
3. Click the first point for the cross-section.

 You must sketch the cross-section on the two-dimensional plane that is orthogonal to
the first leg of the path. Click Show Cross Section to display a window in the two-
dimensional plane. The software displays this plane, which is perpendicular to the path,
as you sketch the cross-section.
 The cardinal point, which is the point where the cross-section is attached to the path, is
defined as you sketch. In other words, the cross-section surrounds the path and is
attached to the path exactly as you sketch it.
 To change the segment from a straight line to an arc, click Arc by 3 Points in the
Path Type list, and then click three points to define the arc.
 To switch back to a straight line after sketching an arc, click Line in the Path Type
list.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 79


Creating Customized Shapes

4. Click the next point for the cross-section.


To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list and
define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Turn Type Value box. The following
graphic shows examples of the available turn types:

5. Click to place other segments of the cross-section as needed.


6. Click the starting point of the cross-section to close it.
7. Click Finish Path.
The Finish Path button is not available until you close the cross-section by clicking the
starting point.
After you place a segment of the cross-section by defining two points, you can click Edit
on the ribbon to change the segment.

Define cross-sectional properties for a prismatic


shape
1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click the Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, select a cross-section type in the Cross- Section
Type list.
If you select Sketch in the Cross-Section Type list, you must sketch the cross-section
using the Path commands before you can edit properties.
3. Click Properties .
4. On the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, click the Cross-Section tab.

80 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

5. Define values for each dimension of the cross-section. Letters such as A, B, and C
represent the cross- sectional dimensions.

 To see what each lettered dimension represents on the cross-section, click Display
Cross-Section Image to view a graphic of the selected cross-sectional type if one
exists in the reference data.
 Cross-sectional images show the dimensions that you can define for the cross-section
type, the default cardinal points for the cross-section type, and the angle for the
cross-section. For example, the following graphic contains the dimensions and cardinal
point for a standard road cross-section.

Not all cross-section types have images associated with them.


6. Select the cardinal point for the cross-section in the Cardinality list.

 The cardinal point is the point where the software attaches the cross-section to the path.
 If you click Display Cross- Section Image to see a graphic of the cross-section,
you can view where each cardinal point is located by selecting each cardinal point in the
list.
7. Type an Angle for the cross-section, if needed.
8. Click OK.

 If you sketch a cross-section, the properties for the cross-section include the X-, Y-, and
Z-coordinates, the turn type, and values for each point that define the cross-section path.
 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section on the Prismatic Shape
Properties dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the cross-
section sketch. For more information, see Modify a Sketched Cross-Section (on page 81).

Modify a sketched cross-section


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape with a sketched cross-section.
3. On the ribbon, click Cross-Section . The software outlines the cross- section path in
yellow.
4. To modify a straight segment in the cross-section, select the segment to modify, and then
make changes on the ribbon.
Modify a Straight Segment in a Path (on page 84)
5. To modify an arc in the cross-section, select the arc to modify, and then make changes on
the ribbon.
Modify an Arc in a Path (on page 85)
6. To modify a turn in the cross-section, select the turn to modify, and then make changes on
the ribbon.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 81


Creating Customized Shapes

Modify a Turn in a Path (on page 85)


7. To move a segment in the cross-section, click the segment to move, and then click the point
from which to move the segment and the point to which to move the segment.
Move Segments of a Path (on page 83)
8. To add segments to the cross-section, click Create on the ribbon, and then click to place the
new segments.
Add Segments to a Path (on page 83)
You can add as many segments to the cross-section as you need. However, you must
close the cross-section to be able to save it.
9. To delete a segment in the cross-section, select the segment to delete, and then click
Delete Selected Items .
10. Click Finish Path.

 The Finish Path button is not available until you close the cross-section by clicking the
starting point.
 The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path.
 The new shape is actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic
Shape ribbon.

Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic shape


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click the Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
3. On the ribbon, click Properties .
4. In the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, click the Cross-Section tab.
5. Make modifications to the cross-section properties.
As you make changes to the cross-section properties, the cross-section changes
appear dynamically in the model.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Finish to apply the changes to the cross-section to the volume.

 If you sketch a cross-section, the properties for the cross-section include the X-, Y-, and
Z-coordinates, the turn type, and values for each point that define the cross-section path.
 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section in the Prismatic Shape
Properties dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the
cross-section sketch. For more information, see Modify a sketched cross-section (on page
81).

82 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

Add segments to a path


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. To add one or more segments to the path, click Create.
5. Click the point on the existing path to insert the new segment.

 You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch relationship indicators when
defining your path.
 You can change the plane for the path at any time by selecting the plane in the Plane
list.
 To change the segment from a straight line to an arc, click Arc by 3 Points in the
Path Type list, and then click three points to define the arc.
 To switch back to a straight line after sketching an arc, click Line in the Path Type
list.
 To break the path, click No Line in the Path Type list.
6. Click to place other points and add to the path as needed.
To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list and
define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Feature Value box.
7. After you place all the points for the new segments, click Finish Path.

 The software does not require that you close the path. You can end the path at any point.
 You can click Edit on the ribbon to change the segment or modify the path further.
 To manually set the length and angle for a segment of the path, change the values in
the Angle and Length boxes on the ribbon.
See Also
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 71)
Create Path Ribbon (on page 73)

Move Segments of a Path


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. Select the segments to move.
You can select multiple segments by holding the CTRL key and clicking the segments.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 83


Creating Customized Shapes

5. To keep the length of a straight segment constant while you move the segment, click
Length Locked .

 When the segment length is locked, the software automatically modifies the turn points,
along with the length and angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved
segment. The length of the moved segment does not change.
 When the segment length is not locked, the software extends or shortens the associated
segments to connect with the new position of the moved segment. The length of the
moved segment can change.
6. Click to specify the starting location of the move vector.
7. Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.
8. Click Finish Path.

 The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon.
 While modifying several elements one at a time, you must use CTRL to select the next
element, and then CTRL to de-select the previous element.

Modify a straight segment in a path


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. Select the straight segment to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding CTRL and clicking the segments.
5. To change the line type for the segment, click a new type in the Path Type list.
6. To change the plane for the segment, click a new plane in the Plane list.
7. To delete the segment, click Delete Selected Items .
8. To keep the length of a straight segment constant when you move the segment, click
Length Locked .

 When the segment length is locked, the software automatically modifies the turn points,
along with the length and angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved
segment. The length of the moved segment does not change.
 When the segment length is not locked, the software extends or shortens the associated
segments to connect with the new position of the moved segment. The length of the
moved segment can change.
9. Click Finish Path.
The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon.
You can also move the segments of a path. For more information, see Move Segments
of a Path (on page 83).

84 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Creating Customized Shapes

Modify an Arc in a Path


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. Select the arc to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding CTRL and clicking the segments.
5. To change the line type for the segment, click a new type in the Path Type list.
6. To change the plane for the segment, click a new plane in the Plane list.
7. To delete the segment, click Delete Selected Items .
8. Click Finish Path.
The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon.
You can also move the segments of a path. For more information, see Move Segments
of a Path (on page 83).

Modify a turn in a path


1. Click Select .
2. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. Select the turn to modify.
When the pointer passes over an object that contains multiple elements, use the
QuickPick feature to help you select the specific element.
5. To change the plane for the segment, click a new plane in the Plane list.
6. To delete the turn, click Delete Selected Items .
7. To change the turn type, select a new type in the Turn Type list.
8. To change the dimensions for the selected turn type, enter a value in the Feature Value
box.
9. Click Finish Path.
The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon.
You can also move the segments of a path. For more information, see Move Segments
of a Path (on page 83).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 85


Creating Customized Shapes

Sketch Properties Dialog Box


Sets options for paths. You cannot edit the different applicable properties.
See Also
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86)

General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the points that make up a path, their X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates, turn types, and turn
type dimensions.
Point No - Displays the point number that identifies the selected point.
X - Displays the location of the point on the X-axis.
Y - Displays the location of the point on the Y-axis.
Z - Displays the location of the point on the Z-axis.
Turn Type - Displays the type of turn associated with the point. Turn types include none, bend,
chamfer, and cornice.
Value - Specifies dimensions for the selected turn type. For bends and cornices, the value
specifies the radius of the bend. For chamfers, the value specifies the dimensions for setback A
and setback B of the chamfer.

86 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

SECTION 8

Place Nozzle
Adds different types of ports to an equipment or equipment component object. You can
specify port location details and properties, including port type (such as foundation ports). The
ability to add ports to an equipment object is required to connect equipment to distributed
systems, such as conduit, HVAC, piping, and cable.

Placing Foundation Ports


When you use the Place Nozzle command to place a foundation port, you are defining the bolt
hole pattern, hole information, and mounting plane for the equipment. A piece of equipment can
have more than one foundation port. During placement, the X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the port
displays so you can place the foundation port precisely in the model.

Place Nozzle Ribbon


Sets options for defining port (such as foundation ports) properties and selecting the shape
object with which the port is associated.
Nozzle Properties - Displays the dynamic occurrence properties so that you can review the
static properties of any port attached to an existing shape.
Port/Nozzle Parent - Specifies the parent (which can be a shape, equipment or an equipment
component by way of their coordinate system) with which the port is associated.
Nozzle Name - Specifies the nozzle name.
Nozzle Length - Sets the nozzle length.
Nozzle Bend Length - Sets the nozzle bend length.
Nozzle Bend Radius - Sets the nozzle bend radius. The Bend Radius value should be less
than or equal to the Nozzle Bend Length and Nozzle Length.

 The Nozzle Length property is available only for elbow nozzles, piping straight nozzles, and
HVAC nozzles.
 The Nozzle Bend Length property is available only for elbow nozzles.
 The Nozzle Bend Radius property is available only for elbow nozzles.

What do you want to do?


 Place a nozzle (on page 88)
 Place a nozzle from a P&ID (on page 89)
 Place a foundation port (on page 89)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 87


Place Nozzle

Place a nozzle
1. Click Place Nozzle on the vertical toolbar.
The nozzle is connected to the cursor to identify the placement location.
2. Select the parent to which to add a nozzle.
You can either select the parent in a graphic view, or you can select it in the
Workplace Explorer.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box appears.
3. On the Occurrence tab, select the type of nozzle to place from the Port Type list.
If you select the PipePort (No Added Graphic) or HvacPort (No Added Graphic)
type, see the Note section following this procedure for information regarding its placement.
4. In the Value grid, enter values for the listed properties.

 You can use the From catalog button to pre-populate values from predefined catalog
nozzles. Values can be overridden after selection of predefined values.
 You can use the Category list to control the types of properties that display in the dialog
box.
 By default, insulation for the nozzle is set the same as the equipment object on which it
is placed. If necessary, you can edit insulation properties during initial placement of the
nozzle, as well as after it is placed. For more information, see the Insulation and
Tracing section on the Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 91).
5. Click the Location tab, and select a placement type from the Placement Type list box.
6. In the Value grid, enter the values for the listed properties.
These location properties are dimensions relative to the selected parent.
7. Click OK.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box closes, and you return to the model with the nozzle
placed, unless the Placement Type selected is Position by Plane and Axis or Position by
Point. In this case, additional steps are required to place the nozzle in the model.

 The PipePort (No Added Graphic) or HvacPort (No Added Graphic) port type is a special
implementation of a piping straight nozzle that is used to add a nozzle port to an existing
graphic. Equipment objects imported with the Place Imported Shape from File command
may have a graphic representation of a nozzle, but no nozzle port. The PipePort (No
Added Graphic) or HvacPort (No Added Graphic) nozzle type, which has all the standard
piping port properties but not the graphics of the piping nozzle, allows you to add a nozzle
port (represented as a circular surface) to the existing shape. After selecting PipePort (No
Added Graphic) or HvacPort (No Added Graphic), the software prompts you to graphically
locate the port in the model by selecting a surface and a cylinder (cone) to define a position
and an axis. You can also place PipePort (No Added Graphic) or HvacPort (No Added
Graphic) using other placement types.
 Press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the nozzle by 90-degree increments at any time
during the placement of the nozzle. Press the up arrow to scroll through the three possible
axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.

88 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

Place a nozzle from a P&ID


1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID that contains the nozzle to place. You can
skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID that contains the nozzle to place.
3. In the P&ID, select the nozzle to place in the model.
4. Click Place Nozzle on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the equipment or designed equipment object on which to place the nozzle.
You can either select the shape in a graphic view, or you can select it in the
Workplace Explorer.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box appears.
6. Verify that the property values defined on the Occurrence tab are correct as compared to
the nozzle report.
7. On the Location tab, specify the placement type and enter values for the location
parameters as needed.
8. Click OK.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box closes, and you return to the model with the nozzle
placed.
9. Click SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis, and verify the correlation status of the nozzle
in the model.
10. If necessary, click Update to transfer data in the P&ID to match the 3D model object.

 The software automatically sets all mapped nozzle properties in the 3D model as defined by
the currently selected P&ID nozzle.
 After the nozzle is placed in the 3D model, it can be moved without affecting the correlation.
If it is deleted, it does not delete the P&ID design basis object.
 Correlation is a relationship between an object in the 3D model and the corresponding
object in the P&ID. For example, a nozzle in the 3D model is related to a nozzle in the P&ID.
 The occurrence properties of the nozzle object in the 3-D model that are not correlated with
corresponding properties in the design basis object (that is, the nozzle in the P&ID) can be
edited without changing the correlation status.

Place a foundation port


1. Click Place Nozzle on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the parent to which to add a nozzle.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box appears.
You can either select the parent in a graphic view, or you can select it in the
Workplace Explorer.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 89


Place Nozzle

3. On the Occurrence tab, select Foundation Port as the type of nozzle to place from the
Port Type list.

The properties and values update to reflect those for foundation ports. For more information,
see Foundation Port Properties Dialog Box (on page 95).
4. On the Occurrence Tab, in the Value grid, enter values for the listed properties.
The Type property selection updates the other properties in the grid. For more
information on the property changes per type, see Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port
Properties) (on page 96).
5. Click the Location tab, and select a placement type from the Placement Type list box.
If you select the Position by Point placement type, the z-axis appears with the
foundation port during placement for more precise orientation with the equipment object.
6. In the Value grid, enter the values for the listed properties.
These location properties are dimensions relative to the selected parent.
7. Click OK.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box closes and you return to the model to place the
foundation port

 Press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the foundation port by 90-degree increments at
any time during the placement operation. Press the up arrow to scroll through the three
possible axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.
 To edit the properties of the new foundation port, right-click the foundation port and select
Properties.

90 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

Nozzle Properties Dialog Box


Displays nozzle properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port Properties) (on page 96)
Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 91)
Location Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 94)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)

Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the nozzle properties that you can edit. The property name appears on the left side of
the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. You can
modify these values after the initial placement of the nozzle to reflect exact design needs or
deviations from the standard part. If you selected more than one nozzle and then selected the
properties command, only the common properties between the selected nozzles appear.
Category - Displays the defined category name for the selected nozzle. This data is retrieved
from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Port Type - Specifies the type of port for placement on a selected shape. If the selected port
type requires user- defined physical dimensions, a bitmap graphic of the selected port type
displays at the bottom of the dialog box. The graphic contains labeled parameters (A, B, C, etc.)
that can be user-defined in the Value column of the grid. If the selected port type requires no
user-defined physical dimensions, no graphic is displayed. This option does not appear when
you access the tab to edit a nozzle that has already been placed in the model.
From catalog - Displays the Select Nozzle dialog box so that you can select an existing nozzle
from the Catalog.
The following is a complete list of properties, both common and unique, that can be defined
using the Occurrence tab. Initial values are defined in the reference data. For more information
on properties, refer to the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available from the
Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

 Properties that display on the Occurrence tab are dependent on the port type you select.
 Properties are listed alphabetically rather than the order in which they may appear.
Actual Depth - Type the actual depth of the cable tray port.
Actual Width - Type the actual width of the cable tray port.
Area - Type the diameter of the nozzle opening.
Bend Length - Type the allowable bend length as an absolute value.
Bend Radius - Type the allowable measurement for the bend radius.
Behavior Controlled by User - Set to False to prevent the nozzle from being deleted from the
model
Conduit Diameter - Displays the diameter of the conduit for the nozzle.
Corner Radius - Type the allowable measurement for the corner radius.
Cpt Offset - Displays the offset value of the center point for the nozzle.
Cross Section Shape - Displays the shape of the nozzle cross section.
Diameter - Type the diameter of the nozzle.
Dimension Base Outer - Displays the outer dimension of the base of the nozzle.
End Practice - Specifies the end practice for the nozzle.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 91


Place Nozzle

End Preparation - Enter the end preparation code for the part port. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.
End Standard - Enter the end standard code for the part port. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Flange or Hub Outside Diameter - Specifies the diameter for the flange or hub of the nozzle.
Flange or Hub Thickness - Displays the thickness of the flange or hub of the nozzle.
Flange or Mechanical Groove Width - Displays the width of the flange or mechanical groove
of the nozzle.
Flange Projection or Socket Offset - Displays the project of the flange or offset of the socket
for the nozzle.
Flange Width - Specifies the width of the flange of the nozzle.
Flow Direction - Enter the flow direction code for the port. Specifying the correct flow direction
code for each part port is very important because the software automatically orients the part to
the flow direction of the pipe or port that the part is connected to. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Flow Direction sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Hub Outside Diameter - Displays the outside diameter of the hub for the nozzle.
Linear Thickness at Face of Flange - Displays the thickness of the flange face for the nozzle.
Linear Thickness at Inside Diameter - Displays the thickness of the inside diameter of the
nozzle.
Name - Specifies the name of the port. This name is usually generated by the active name rule.
If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User Defined.
Nozzle Length - Type the measurement for the nozzle length.
Nominal Size - Type the nominal size of the port.
Nominal Width - Type the nominal width of the cable tray port.
Nominal Depth - Type the nominal depth of the cable tray port.
NPD Unit Type -Enter the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm or in.
Piping Outside Diameter - Displays the outside diameter of the piping for the nozzle.
Piping Point Basis - Type the piping point basis code that identifies the function of the port.
Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Piping Point Basis sheet in the
Codelist Number column.
Port Depth - Specifies the depth of the port.
Port Index - Specifies the index number for the port.
Port Type - Type the electrical port type of the nozzle.
Pressure Rating - Enter the pressure rating code for the part port. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Raised Face or Socket Diameter - Displays the diameter of the raised face or socket of the
nozzle.
Rating Practice - Specifies the rating practice for the nozzle
Reinforced Wall Thickness - Displays the thickness of the reinforced wall of the nozzle.
Schedule Practice - Specifies the schedule practice for the nozzle.
Schedule Thickness - Type the schedule thickness short description or code for the part port.
Valid codes and short descriptions are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Schedule Thickness sheet in the Codelist Number and Schedule Thickness Short
Description columns.
Seating or Groove or Socket Depth - Displays the depth of the seating, groove, or socket of
the nozzle.

92 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

Shape Depth - Displays the depth of the nozzle shape.


Shape Width - Displays the width of the nozzle shape.
Sub Type - Specify the electrical sub-type of the nozzle.
Terminal - Specify the type of terminal electrical connection for the port.
Termination Class - Specifies the termination class for the nozzle.
Termination Subclass - Specifies the termination sub-class for the nozzle.
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the nozzle.
Tightness - Type the tightness of the nozzle.
Wall Thickness or Groove Setback - Displays the thickness of the wall or the setback of the
groove for the nozzle.

Position and Orientation


The Position and Orientation properties are editable only if the Placement Type is set
to Position by Point.
East - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system in the
east direction.
North - Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system in the
north direction.
Elevation - Displays the distance of the connection point above or below the active coordinate
system.
Bearing - Displays the bearing angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object
to the X-axis of its local coordinate system. The local X-axis is the default axis of primary
symmetry for all symbols in the catalog. This option sets the reference in the model to the active
coordinate system North axis. The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from the active
coordinate system north looking in the negative active coordinate system direction. That is,
down from 0 to 360 degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the bearing measure displays 0 degrees.
Pitch - Displays the pitch angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
X-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
the intersection of the vertical plane through the X-axis of the local coordinate system and the
active coordinate system horizontal plane. The angle is measured in the positive direction from
the horizontal plane in the active coordinate system up direction regardless of the current
bearing. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and +90 degrees with 0 indicating
horizontal.
Roll - Displays the roll angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
Y-axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that is
perpendicular to the local coordinate system x-axis and in the horizontal plane. Roll angles are
measured clockwise from horizontal to the y axis of the local coordinate system. The roll angle is
between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles, but the software will
automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then
the reference in the model is the North axis.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Criteria – Displays the insulation criteria for the nozzle. If you select Up to Neck
Only, the nozzle is insulated up to the neck, leaving the flange not insulated. To insulate both
the nozzle neck and flange, select Complete.
Insulation Purpose – Displays the purpose of insulation.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 93


Place Nozzle

Insulation Material – Displays the material of insulation.


Insulation Thickness – Displays the thickness of insulation material.
Is Insulated - Displays whether the nozzle object is insulated. If set to False, you cannot modify
the information to any of the insulation properties.
Insulation Operating Temperature - Displays the number of degrees of the operating
temperature.
Insulation Surface Area - Displays the surface area measurement of the insulation.
Insulation Requirement - Displays the requirement of insulation.
Insulation Type – Displays the type of insulation.

 If displays in the Value box, the corresponding insulation property for the object is
inherited from the parent equipment or equipment component to which the object belongs.

 Insulation is supported only on piping and HVAC equipment and component nozzles.

Select Nozzle Dialog Box


Specifies the nozzle needed for placement. This dialog box appears when you click From
Catalog on the Nozzle Properties dialog box. By browsing through the part hierarchy, you can
find any nozzle in the Catalog database. After you select a nozzle, the software returns you to
the Nozzle Properties dialog box.
Back - Returns you to the previously selected nozzle. Use this command to navigate through
the hierarchy to the specific part that you need.
Forward - Sends you to the last selected nozzle that you moved away from by using the
Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific part that you
need.
Up One Level - Brings up the next highest level of the Catalog hierarchy. Use this command
to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific part that you need.
Properties - Displays the nozzle properties as defined in the catalog.
Preview - Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected nozzle. The image file must be assigned
to the nozzle in the catalog reference data.
List View - Sets the dialog box to display nozzles in a list view.
Grid View - Sets the dialog box to display nozzles in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port Properties) (on page 96)
Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 91)

94 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

Location Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog Box)


Sets options for placing a nozzle on a designed equipment object.
Placement Type - Specifies a location type for the nozzle. The following location types are
available for nozzles:

Placement Type Description


Radial Straight nozzle with nozzle centerline on the radial plane.
Tangential Straight nozzle on the radial plane, but the nozzle centerline does
not intersect the vessel axis.
Axial Straight nozzle normal to radial plane.
Skew Straight nozzle that is tilted from both the radial plane and the vessel
axis.
Axial Elbow Elbow nozzle with hub centerline normal to the radial plane.
Radial Elbow Elbow nozzle placed with the hub radial to the vessel axis.
Offset Radial Elbow Elbow nozzle placed with the hub tangential to the vessel axis.
Offset Skew Skew nozzle with a parallel offset in the radial plane.
Position by Plane and Available with all Nozzles including PipePort (No Added Graphic)
Axis and HvacPort (No Added Graphic).
Position by Point Available with all Nozzles including PipePort (No Added Graphic)
and HvacPort (No Added Graphic).
Property - Identifies the location parameters of the selected nozzle.
Value - Shows the current values for all location parameters of the selected nozzle. You can
modify these values after the initial placement of the nozzle to reflect exact design needs or
deviations from the standard part.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 95


Place Nozzle

Foundation Port Properties Dialog Box


Displays foundation port properties for review and editing.
See Also
Location Tab (Foundation Port Properties) (on page 97)
Holes Tab (Foundation Port Properties) (on page 98)
Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port Properties) (on page 96)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)

Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port Properties)


Displays the foundation port properties that you can edit.
Category - Displays the defined category name for the selected nozzle. This data is retrieved
from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Port Type - Indicates that the port type is foundation port and is read-only.
From catalog - This button is not available when editing properties for a foundation port.

General Properties for All Foundation Ports


Type - Specifies the type of foundation port. The available types are Rectangular Foundation
Port, Circular Foundation Port, Single Hole, and No Hole. The Type changes the other
properties available on the foundation port.
Name - Name applied to the selected foundation port. Foundation ports do not require naming
rules. If a naming rule is not applied, a default naming convention is applied, such as the
equipment name with the foundation port number appended (for example:
TankA-FoundationPort1).
Default Foundation - Specifies a default structural foundation for the equipment. Refer to the
Equipment.xls for more information on default foundations for specific equipment objects.
Liner Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the liner for the foundation port.
Footprint Offset - Indicates the offset value to be used by the Structure task when the
foundation is constructed for the foundation port. This property is not currently used.
Hole Diameter - Specifies the diameter of the bolt holes.
Behavior Controlled by User - Indicates whether or not the foundation port can be deleted. If
set to False, the foundation port cannot be deleted from the model.

Circular Foundation Port Type


When you select the Circular Foundation Port type, the software generates an equally spaced
circular bolt hole pattern based on the Number of Holes and the Bolt Circle Diameter
properties.
Additional properties are:
Number of Holes - Specifies the number of bolt holes for the foundation port.
Bolt Circle Diameter - Specifies the diameter of the bolt circle.

Rectangular Foundation Port Type


When you select the Rectangular Foundation Port type, the software uses "bolt hole 1" as the
foundation port origin with the y-axis pointing to "bolt hole 2".
Additional properties are:

96 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

Number of Bolt Holes in X - Specifies the number of bolt holes on the x-axis of the foundation
port.
Number of Bolt hoes in Y - Specifies the number of bolt holes in the y-axis of the foundation
port.
Distance between Holes (X) - Indicates the distance between the bolt holes on the x-axis of the
foundation port.
Distance between Holes (Y) - Indicates the distance between the bolt holes on the y-axis of the
foundation port.

Single Hole Type


When you select the Single Hole foundation port type, the software places the local coordinate
system origin at the center of the bolt hole. The software does not generate a default footprint
boundary with this option.

No Hole Type
When you select the No Hole foundation port type, the software generates a default footprint
boundary and places the local coordinate system origin for the foundation port at the lower left
with the y-axis pointing up.
If the properties on this dialog box are read-only, the selected foundation port is part of
the delivered equipment object.

Location Tab (Foundation Port Properties)


Sets options for a foundation port on an equipment object.
Placement Type - Specifies a location type for the nozzle. The following location types are
available for foundation ports:

Placement Type Description


Radial Straight foundation port with centerline on the radial plane.
Tangential Straight foundation port on the radial plane, but the port centerline does
not intersect the vessel axis.
Axial Straight foundation port normal to radial plane.
Skew Straight foundation port that is tilted from both the radial plane and the
vessel axis.
Offset Skew Skew foundation port with a parallel offset in the radial plane.
Position by Point Available with all foundation ports.
Position by Plane Available with all foundation ports.
and Axis
Property - Identifies the location parameters of the selected foundation port.
Value - Shows the current values for all location parameters of the selected foundation port. You
can modify these values during the initial placement of the foundation port to reflect exact design
needs or deviations from the standard part.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 97


Place Nozzle

Holes Tab (Foundation Port Properties)


Displays X- and Y-location, diameter, and mounting information for each bolt hole.
This information is read-only.

98 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Place Nozzle

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 99


SECTION 9

Organizing Space Objects


You can create folders to provide a hierarchical storage system for the space objects that you
create in the Space Management task, just as you use folders to organize information in a filing
cabinet. You can create an indefinite hierarchy of space objects.

The Space tab of the Workspace Explorer displays all the volumes in the workspace in a
classification hierarchy that reflects the various relationships defined for the space objects. The
content represents the current space objects loaded from the database into the active
workspace. When you select a space object in the Workspace Explorer, it appears highlighted
with the select color in the active graphic view. Additionally, the software defaults to edit mode
and displays the Edit Volume ribbon, which you can use to modify the selected space object.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 101


Organizing Space Objects

102 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 10

Create Space Folder


Creates a new hierarchical folder for organizing your space objects. When you click Create
Space Folder , a corresponding ribbon appears that allows you to define a parent and name
for the new folder. You can create an indefinite hierarchy of spaces.
You must create space folders in a permission group with write access or more in order to be
able to add volumes to the space folders.
You can create folders to provide a hierarchical storage system for the space objects that you
create in the Space Management task, just as you use folders to organize information in a filing
cabinet. You can create an indefinite hierarchy of space objects.

The Space tab of the Workspace Explorer displays all the volumes in the workspace in a
classification hierarchy that reflects the various relationships defined for the space objects. The
content represents the current space objects loaded from the database into the active
workspace. When you select a space object in the Workspace Explorer, it appears highlighted
with the select color in the active graphic view. Additionally, the software defaults to edit mode
and displays the Edit Volume ribbon, which you can use to modify the selected space object.

Create Space Folder Ribbon


Sets options for creating a new space folder. After you have completed the required fields, you
can click the Space tab in the Workspace Explorer to view the results.
Properties - Displays the Space Folder Properties Dialog Box (on page 127).
Finish - Creates the space folder with the Name and Parent properties that you specify.
Name - Specifies a name for the new space folder.
Parent - Specifies a location within the space hierarchy. The new space folder will become a
child of the selected parent. Selecting More in the list opens the Select Space Folder dialog
box, which displays the complete space hierarchy.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 103


Organizing Space Objects

Create Space Folder Ribbon


Sets options for creating a new space folder. After you have completed the required fields, you
can click the Space tab in the Workspace Explorer to view the results.
Properties - Displays the Space Folder Properties Dialog Box (on page 127).
Finish - Creates the space folder with the Name and Parent properties that you specify.
Name - Specifies a name for the new space folder.
Parent - Specifies a location within the space hierarchy. The new space folder will become a
child of the selected parent. Selecting More in the list opens the Select Space Folder dialog
box, which displays the complete space hierarchy.

Select Space Folder Dialog Box


Specifies a parent for a folder or volume in the space hierarchy. This dialog box appears when
you select More in the Parent box on the Create Space Folder ribbon, and when you select
More in the Space folder boxes on the volume creation and modification ribbons.
Look In - Specifies from which location you want the software to pull hierarchical information.
You can retrieve hierarchical information from either the workspace or from the entire model
database.

Create a space folder


1. Click Create Space Folder on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify a name for the folder in the Name box, or accept the default name.
3. Specify a parent for the folder in the Parent list.
You can select More in the drop-down list to display the Select Space Folder Dialog
Box (on page 104), which displays the full space hierarchy.
4. Click Finish.
You must create space folders in a permission group with write access or more in order
to be able to add volumes to the space folders.
See Also
Create Space Objects (on page 105)

104 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 11

Create Space Objects


Several methods of creating space objects, or volumes, exist in the Space Management task.
You can provide two or four points to identify a rectangular cube, or you can select existing
boundaries to define the space. The software links these space objects to their location
coordinates relative to the global coordinate system.
Volumes are stored in the model. When a task such as Piping is active, you can see the defined
volumes on the Space tab of the Workspace Explorer. With this solution, you can locate and
manipulate volumes quickly and easily. When you create a volume, you can name it or have the
software generate a name. You can also specify the type of volume: an area, zone, interference
zone, region, or drawing volume. For drawing volumes, you cannot change the type after initial
creation.
You can use SmartSketch glyphs and grids when you create space objects. You should also
note the coordinate system triad that appears during volume creation. The orientation of a
volume is helpful when you create volumes for drawings.
When you associate volumes with other objects in the model, if the associated objects change,
then the size or dimensions of the volumes update accordingly. During volume creation and
modification, you can specify whether the points of the volume are associated to objects in the
model or not.

 4 E grid planes
 3 N grid planes
 2 EL planes
Number of Volumes = (4-1) * (3-1) * (2-1) = 3 * 2 * 1 = 6

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 105


Create Space Objects

Placing Volumes Using Primitive Shapes


You can place a volume using a list of pre-defined volume types and shapes and then provide
dimensional information to further define the shape size. Using Place Volume by Primitive
Shapes , you select a shape and specify the space type. You then identify a point in the
model to place the shape origin point.

Place Volume by Two Points


Defines a volume by selecting two points to represent opposite vertices of the volume that
you need. The two points can be located using standard tools, such as PinPoint or by using
SmartSketch relationship indicators.
Using the Type box, you can associate the volume with a design specification from the catalog
database.

Place Volume by Two Points Ribbon


Sets options for placing volumes defined by opposite vertices using the Place Volume by Two
Points command.
Volume Properties - Displays the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), which allows you
to set properties for the volume you are placing.
Volume Point 1 - Defines the first point for the definition of the volume.
Volume Point 2 - Defines the second point for the definition of the volume.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed.
Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the list opens the Select System
Dialog Box (on page 108) from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the drop-down list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page
104) dialog box from which you can select a folder.
Enable Assoc Point Creation - Specifies that the points of the volume are associative
points, if the software detects constraints for the points. Associative points affect the behavior of
the volume during modification such as movement or rotation.

106 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Create Space Objects

Disable Assoc Point Creation - Specifies that the points of the volume are not associative
points, even if the software finds constraints. You can click this button during or after volume
placement. For example, during placement, you can use the default behavior at first
(associative), and then click the non-associative option part-way through the construction
process. When the non-associative option is specified, the software switches its behavior from
associative to non-associative. The points created earlier retain their associativity.

 To indicate that the volume has associative points, the Enable Assoc Point Creation

button is indented on the ribbon .


 To indicate that the volume has no associative points, the Enable Assoc Point Creation
button is not indented on the ribbon, and the Disable Assoc Point Creation button is

unavailable .
 If multiple volumes are selected, the Enable Assoc Point Creation button is not displayed.
However, if at least one associative point exists, the Enable Assoc Point Creation button

displays on the ribbon .


Break Association - Deletes the relationship between the volume and an object. Objects
associated with a volume highlight when the volume is selected. This option is only available
when modifying a selected volume that has an object associated with it.

What do you want to do?


 Place a volume by two points (on page 109)
 Place a volume by two points using PinPoint (on page 110)

Place Volume by Two Points Ribbon


Sets options for placing volumes defined by opposite vertices using the Place Volume by Two
Points command.
Volume Properties - Displays the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), which allows you
to set properties for the volume you are placing.
Volume Point 1 - Defines the first point for the definition of the volume.
Volume Point 2 - Defines the second point for the definition of the volume.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed.
Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the list opens the Select System
Dialog Box (on page 108) from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the drop-down list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page
104) dialog box from which you can select a folder.
Enable Assoc Point Creation - Specifies that the points of the volume are associative
points, if the software detects constraints for the points. Associative points affect the behavior of
the volume during modification such as movement or rotation.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 107


Create Space Objects

Disable Assoc Point Creation - Specifies that the points of the volume are not associative
points, even if the software finds constraints. You can click this button during or after volume
placement. For example, during placement, you can use the default behavior at first
(associative), and then click the non-associative option part-way through the construction
process. When the non-associative option is specified, the software switches its behavior from
associative to non-associative. The points created earlier retain their associativity.

 To indicate that the volume has associative points, the Enable Assoc Point Creation

button is indented on the ribbon .


 To indicate that the volume has no associative points, the Enable Assoc Point Creation
button is not indented on the ribbon, and the Disable Assoc Point Creation button is

unavailable .
 If multiple volumes are selected, the Enable Assoc Point Creation button is not displayed.
However, if at least one associative point exists, the Enable Assoc Point Creation button

displays on the ribbon .


Break Association - Deletes the relationship between the volume and an object. Objects
associated with a volume highlight when the volume is selected. This option is only available
when modifying a selected volume that has an object associated with it.

Select System Dialog Box


Specifies the type of space needed for placement. This dialog box appears when you select
More in the Type box on a horizontal ribbon. By browsing through the space hierarchy, you can
find any type of space object defined in the Catalog database. After you select a space object,
the software returns you to the model, where you can finalize configuration and placement of the
space.
Save - Saves the active row to the catalog database. This command is available only in the
Catalog task.
Copy - Copies the selected object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Paste - Pastes a copied object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Delete - Deletes the selected object. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Undo - Reverses the most recent operation. This command is available only in the
Catalog task.
Insert Row - Inserts a blank row into the grid view. This command is available only in the
Catalog task.
Move Up - Moves the select list entry up one in the editable grid. This command is available
only in the Catalog task.
Move Down - Moves the select list entry down one in the editable grid. This command is
available only in the Catalog task.
Properties - Displays the properties of the selected object. The properties on this dialog
box are read-only.
Preview - Opens a bitmap file that was assigned to a part or part class in the reference
data.

108 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Create Space Objects

Filter - Filters the data in the content view to quickly find what you are looking for. This
command is available only in the Catalog task.
Sort - Sorts data in the content view by multiple columns to quickly find what you are looking
for. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Customize Current View - Controls which property columns display in the content view and
in what order. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
List View - Displays the information in the content view in a list format.
Grid View - Displays the information in the content view in a table format.
Back - Highlights the last selected item or folder.
Forward - Advances the display forward to return the browser display to the last item that
you selected before you used Back .
Up One Level - Moves the focus up one level in the catalog hierarchy.
Check Data - Checks the consistency of the data in the grid against other data in the
catalog. This command is available only in the Catalog task.
Help - Displays online Help for the active task.
Address - Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.
See Also
Create Space Objects (on page 105)
Space Management

Place a volume by two points


1. Click Place Volume by Two Points on the vertical toolbar.
2. Define the first point of the rectangular volume.
3. Specify a name for the volume in the Name box, or accept the default name.
4. Select a volume type from the Type list.
The list in the Type box provides only the last few types selected from the catalog.
Choosing More displays the Select System Dialog Box (on page 108), which allows you to
select any type of space found in the catalog database.
5. Select a folder from the Space folder list.

 If no other folders have been created, the default is the model (root).
 Assigning volumes to a space folder organizes volumes in the current model. Additional
folders may be created with the Create Space Folder (on page 103).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 109


Create Space Objects

6. Define the opposite corner of the rectangular volume.

 You can also define the rectangular volume by using PinPoint on the horizontal
toolbar.
 The Type list is populated by the reference data and can be customized on a model-
by-model basis. For more information on customizing space management reference data,
see the Space Management Reference Data Guide, available from the Help > Printable
Guides command.
 To associate the points of the volume with points in the model, such as grid intersections,
you can click Enable Assoc Point Creation on the ribbon. You can drop the associative
points during or after volume placement by clicking Disable Assoc Point Creation . The
software prompts you for confirmation.
 By default, the global coordinate system is used to orient the rectangular volume relative to
the placement points; however, you can use the Coordinate system list on the PinPoint
ribbon to select a different active coordinate system. After the space object is placed, it
maintains a local coordinate system that is used in future edits of the space object. The
orientation of the space object does not change if the active coordinate system changes. For
more information, see the Common User's Guide, available from the Help > Printable
Guides command.

Place a volume by two points using PinPoint


1. Click PinPoint on the horizontal toolbar.
2. Select the Rectangular Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
3. Click Place Volume by Two Points on the vertical toolbar.
4. Define the first point of the rectangular volume.
By default, the software displays help lines and distance values as you create the
volume. You can use Display On/Off on the PinPoint ribbon to toggle the display on
and off.
5. Specify a name for the volume in the Name box, or accept the default name.
6. Select a type of volume from the Type list.
The list in the Type box provides only the last few types selected from the catalog.
Choosing More displays the Select System Dialog Box (on page 108), which allows you to
select any type of space found in the catalog database.
7. Select a folder from the Space folder list.
If no other folders have been created, the default is the model (root).
8. On the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, and elevation coordinates of the volume
that you want to place. The software displays a footprint of the new volume in the model.

110 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Create Space Objects

9. Click in the graphic view to place the volume.

 PinPoint helps you place objects with precision by displaying coordinate data relative to a
specified coordinate position. You can use PinPoint in conjunction with the other place
volume and place drawing volume commands. For more information about PinPoint ,
see the Common User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
 By default, the global coordinate system is used to orient the rectangular volume relative to
the placement points; however, you can use the Coordinate system list prior to placement
to select a different active coordinate system. After the space object is placed, it maintains a
local coordinate system that is used in future edits of the space object. The orientation of the
space object does not change if the active coordinate system changes.
 If a different coordinate system is selected in the Coordinate System field, you must click
Set Target to Origin to reset the ribbon values.
 You can use function keys with the PinPoint command. Press F6 to lock and unlock the E
value or absolute distance. Press F7 to lock and unlock the N value or horizontal angle.
Press F8 to lock and unlock the EL value or vertical angle. Press F9 to turn the display of
help lines and distance values on and off. Press F12 to reposition the target.

Place Volume by Four Points


Defines a space by entering three points to define a base plane and a fourth point to define
elevation or depth. By selecting the three planar points in the plan view, you can ensure that the
volume is parallel to the base elevation plane of your design.
Place Volume by Four Points supports rotated views, which you can use with volume
drawing types in the Drawings and Reports task to create a rotated view on a drawing. The
first and second points specified in the command determine the X-orientation of the view on the
resulting drawing.

Place Volume by Four Points Ribbon


Sets options for placing a volume defined by three planar points and an elevation point.
Volume Properties - Displays the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), which allows you
to set properties for the volume that you are placing.
Volume Point 1 - Sets the first point for the definition of the volume.
Volume Point 2 - Places the second point for definition of the volume, which determines the
length of the volume along the X-axis.
The Place Volume by Four Points command supports rotated views, which you can use with
volume drawing types in the Drawings and Reports task to create a rotated view on a drawing.
The first and second points specified in the command determine the X-orientation of the view on
the resulting drawing.
Volume Point 3 - Defines the third point for the space to be created, which determines the
length of the volume along the Y-axis, and defines a horizontal plane of the surface.
Volume Point 4 - Sets the elevation of the new volume along the Z-axis.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 111


Create Space Objects

Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the list opens the Select System
Dialog Box (on page 108) from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page 104) from
which you can select a folder.
Break Association - Deletes the relationship between the volume and an object. Objects
associated with a volume highlight when the volume is selected. This option is only available
when modifying a selected volume that has an object associated with it.

Place Volume by Four Points Ribbon


Sets options for placing a volume defined by three planar points and an elevation point.
Volume Properties - Displays the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), which allows you
to set properties for the volume that you are placing.
Volume Point 1 - Sets the first point for the definition of the volume.
Volume Point 2 - Places the second point for definition of the volume, which determines the
length of the volume along the X-axis.
The Place Volume by Four Points command supports rotated views, which you can use with
volume drawing types in the Drawings and Reports task to create a rotated view on a drawing.
The first and second points specified in the command determine the X-orientation of the view on
the resulting drawing.
Volume Point 3 - Defines the third point for the space to be created, which determines the
length of the volume along the Y-axis, and defines a horizontal plane of the surface.
Volume Point 4 - Sets the elevation of the new volume along the Z-axis.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed.
Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the list opens the Select System
Dialog Box (on page 108) from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page 104) from
which you can select a folder.
Break Association - Deletes the relationship between the volume and an object. Objects
associated with a volume highlight when the volume is selected. This option is only available
when modifying a selected volume that has an object associated with it.

Place a volume by four points


1. Click Place Volume by Four Points on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select three points to define a plane.
3. Specify a name for the volume in the Name box, or accept the default name.
4. Select a volume type from the Type list.
The list in the Type box provides only the last few types selected from the catalog.
Choosing More displays the Select System Dialog Box (on page 108), which allows you to
select any type of space found in the catalog database.

112 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Create Space Objects

5. Select a folder from the Space folder list.

 If no other folders have been created, the default is the model (root).
 Assigning volumes to a space folder organizes volumes in the current model. Additional
folders may be created with the Create Space Folder (on page 103).
6. Select a fourth point to define the elevation from your defined plane for the volume.

 Place Volume by Four Points supports rotated views, which you can use with volume
drawing types in the Drawings and Reports task to create a rotated view on a drawing. The
first and second points specified in the command determine the X-orientation of the view on
the resulting drawing.
 You can also define the rectangular volume by using PinPoint on the horizontal
toolbar.
 The Type list is populated by the reference data and can be customized on a model-
by-model basis. For more information on customizing space management reference data,
see the Space Management Reference Data Guide, available from the Help > Printable
Guides command.
 By default, the global coordinate system is used to orient the rectangular volume relative to
the placement points; however, you can use the Coordinate system list on the PinPoint
ribbon to select a different active coordinate system. After the space object is placed, it
maintains a local coordinate system that is used in future edits of the space object. The
orientation of the space object does not change if the active coordinate system changes. For
more information, see the Common User's Guide, available from the Help > Printable
Guides command.
See Also
Edit Volume Properties (on page 127)
Create Space Objects (on page 105)
Place a Volume by Two Points Using PinPoint (on page 110)
Place a Volume by Two Points (on page 109)
Place a Volume by Four Points (on page 112)

Place Cylindrical Zone Command


Places a cylindrical volume in the model by providing dimensional information to define the
size.
After the appropriate information is provided, the location of the space object in the model is
controlled graphically by dragging the shape around the model. You can use existing tools such
as the SmartSketch relationship indicators and PinPoint to position the shape. Each volume
has an origin point as part of its definition, and the location of the volume is always relative to
the active coordinate system.
Place Cylindrical Zone Ribbon (on page 114)
See Also
Place a Cylindrical Zone (on page 114)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 113


Create Space Objects

Place Cylindrical Zone Ribbon


Sets options for placing a space object using a primitive shape. Primitive shapes are defined in
the Equipment and Furnishings reference data for designed equipment.
Volume Properties - Displays the Volume Properties dialog box, which allows you to set
properties for the volume that you are placing.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed. Names must be unique across the entire model.
Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the dropdown list opens the Select
System Dialog Box (on page 108) dialog box from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the dropdown list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page 104)
from which you can select a folder.
See Also
Create Space Objects (on page 105)

Place a Cylindrical Zone


1. Click Place Cylindrical Zone on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Zone Properties dialog box, select the volume type in the Type dropdown list.
3. On the Shape tab, enter the length and diameter of the zone.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Specify a name for the volume in the Name box, or accept the default name.
6. Select a volume type from the Type list.
7. Select a folder from the Space folder list.

 If no other folders have been created, the default is the Plant.


 Assigning volumes to a space folder organizes volumes in the current model. Additional
folders can be created with the Create Space Folder (on page 103) command.
8. Click a location in the model to place the volume.
See Also
Place Cylindrical Zone Command (on page 113)

114 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 12

Associating Volumes with Objects


The software allows you to create relationships between objects and volumes in the model. An
example is associating an interference volume with a particular pump so that when the pump is
moved, the interference volume is also moved.
The relationship provides the following behaviors:
 If the related object moves or rotates, the space moves or rotates by the same
transformation. The space size is not a function of the related object size.
 If the related object is copied or pasted, the space is also copied or pasted.
 If the space is copied or pasted, neither the related object nor the relationship is copied or
pasted. You just get a new space.
 If the space is deleted, the relationship is deleted but not the related object.
You can view the properties of the relationship on the Relationship tab of the Properties dialog
boxes for the related object and for the space.
When you select a volume, any objects related to the select volume highlight.
See Also
Create a Relationship Between a Volume and an Object (on page 116)

Associate Volume to Object


Establishes a relationship between an object and a volume in the model.
The software allows you to create relationships between objects and volumes in the model. An
example is associating an interference volume with a particular pump so that when the pump is
moved, the interference volume is also moved.
The relationship provides the following behaviors:
 If the related object moves or rotates, the space moves or rotates by the same
transformation. The space size is not a function of the related object size.
 If the related object is copied or pasted, the space is also copied or pasted.
 If the space is copied or pasted, neither the related object nor the relationship is copied or
pasted. You just get a new space.
 If the space is deleted, the relationship is deleted but not the related object.
You can view the properties of the relationship on the Relationship tab of the Properties dialog
boxes for the related object and for the space.
When you select a volume, any objects related to the select volume highlight.

What do you want to do?


 Create a relationship between a volume and an object (on page 116)
 Delete a relationship between a volume and an object (on page 116)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 115


Associating Volumes with Objects

Create a relationship between a volume and an object


1. Click Associate Volume to Object on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select a space in the model.
3. Select an object in the model. For example, you can select a pump.
If you want to associate more than one space to an object, select the spaces before
clicking Associate Volume to Object .

Delete a relationship between a volume and an object


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select a space in the model.
3. Click Break Associate on the ribbon.

Edit Volume Ribbon


Sets options for modifying a volume that has been placed in the model. This ribbon appears
when you select a volume.
Volume Properties - Displays the Volume Properties dialog box, which allows you to set
properties for the volume.
Volume Point 1 - Specifies that you are selecting the first point for the definition of the
volume.
Volume Point 2 - Specifies that you are selecting the second point for the definition of the
volume.
If the selected volume was placed using the Place Volume by Four Points
command, the ribbon also displays Volume Point 3 and Volume Point 4 buttons.
Handles - Allows you to adjust the size of the selected space object by dragging its
bounded planes.
If you try to modify a volume using handles, and that volume is constrained, the software
displays a message asking if you want to remove the constraint and continue modification. You
can constrain volumes by specifying keypoints such as grid intersections during volume
placement.
Name - Displays the default name for the space (as dictated by the active name rule), and
allows you to enter a different name, if needed.
Type - Specifies the type of volume. Selecting More from the list opens the Select System
Dialog Box (on page 108) from which you can select a space type.
Space folder - Allows you to assign the new volume to a folder in the space hierarchy.
Selecting More from the drop-down list opens the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page
104) dialog box from which you can select a folder.

116 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Modify the placement points of a volume


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In the model, select the space object with the placement points that you want to edit.
You can also select a space object by clicking its name on the Space tab in the
Workspace Explorer.
3. On the Edit Volume ribbon, click Volume Point 1 . The software prompts you to enter
the first point for the definition of the selected space object.
4. Click Volume Point 2 . The software prompts you to enter the second point for the
definition of the selected space object.
5. Right-click to end the command.
After the volume is placed in the new location, you can continue to use the Edit
Volume ribbon to modify properties of the selected volume. A right-click takes the software
out of modification, or editing, mode.

Modify the volume size by dragging


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In the model, select a volume object.
You can also select an object by clicking its name on the Space tab in the Workspace
Explorer.
3. On the Edit Volume ribbon, click Handles .

4. As you move the mouse over the selected object, the corresponding bounded plane or
surface is highlighted. Click to select the plane you want to move.
The Select cursor changes to a crosshair.
5. As you drag your mouse, the selected surface moves to either increase or decrease the
object size.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 117


Associating Volumes with Objects

6. Click again to end the move and set the new volume size.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to move other faces to change the size.

Move a volume to a new location


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In the model, select the volume that you want to move.
You can also select a volume by clicking its name on the Space tab in the Workspace
Explorer.
3. Click Edit > Move. The software prompts you to indicate the origination (or from) location.
4. Select the origination location of the volume. The software prompts you to indicate the
destination (or to) location of the volume that you want to move.
5. Click the destination location for the volume that you want to move.
6. Right-click to end the command.

 Selecting a volume automatically displays the edit ribbon. After the volume is placed in the
new location, you can use the edit ribbon to modify the properties of the selected volume. A
right-click takes the software out of modification mode.
 To start the Move command, you can also click Move on the horizontal toolbar;
however, the edit ribbon does not appear and no other modifications to the volume can be
performed until after the move is complete.

Convert a standard cross-section to a sketch


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. Select the volume for which you want to modify the cross-section.
You can modify the path for volumes created with Place Volume Along Path , but
not for volumes created with other commands.
3. On the ribbon, click Cross-Section to display the Properties dialog box.
4. On the Cross-Section tab, select Sketch in the Cross-Section list.
5. Click OK.
The standard cross-section is converted to a sketched cross-section. The shape of the
original cross-section is broken down into the segments and points that define the path of
the cross-section. You can modify these segments to customize the cross-section.
6. Make modifications to the sketched cross-section as needed.
Modify a Sketched Cross-Section (on page 118)
7. Click Finish on the Place Volume Along Path ribbon to save the changes to the volume.

 When you convert a standard cross-section to a sketch, the properties for the sketched
cross-section include the coordinates, the turn type, and values for each point that define the
cross-sectional path.
 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section on the Volume Properties
dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the cross-sectional
sketch.

118 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Delete a space object


1. Click the Space tab in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click the space object that you want to remove.
3. Click Edit > Delete.
You can also click Delete on the horizontal toolbar.

 Delete propagates down the hierarchy. For example, if you delete a space folder, its
children (if any) and all the volumes contained in the folder are deleted as well.
 If you delete a drawing volume in the model, the software deletes any associated drawings
and drawing views.
 Deleting a merged volume deletes all of the sub-volumes associated with it.
 Deleting a volume bound by spaces deletes the individual integrity of the sub-volumes but
does not delete the sub-volumes themselves.

Properties Dialog Box


Sets options for the space objects that you create in the Space Management task. The dialog
box title correlates to the type of space object that you select in the model. For example, if you
select an area and then display its properties, the title of the dialog box is Area Properties, as
shown in the following illustration:

General Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) (on page 120)


Shape Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Cross-Section Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box) (on page 126)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Notes Tab (on page 197)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 119


Associating Volumes with Objects

General Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box)


Sets general options for the selected space object.

Standard
Type - Displays the volume type of the selected space object. You can use the list to select an
alternative type. Available types are defined in the reference data.
The data that displays in the Properties and Values columns is determined by
what is selected in the Type list; however, all volume types have the following standard
properties.
Name - Identifies the name property. The name can be either user-defined or generated by
Name Rule conventions defined for the permission group.
Name Rule - Determines the naming rule used to designate the selected space object. If the
status of a space object is set to In Review, this option cannot be edited.
Space Folder - Selects the space folder in which the selected space object resides. Space
folders are used to organize space objects within the model.
Class - Displays one of four volume classes - Area, Zone, Interference Volume, or Drawing
Volume. This property is read-only.
The following property only appears when you select Interference Volume in the
Type list.
Volume - Displays the net volume of the selected Space Management volume. This property is
read-only and is not displayed during object creation.
Surface Area - Displays the total surface area of the selected Space Management volume. This
property is read-only and is not shown during object creation.
Display Aspect - Specifies the volume display aspect. The display aspect list is populated by
what is defined in the reference data.
The following Route Zones display additional Standard category properties specific
to their zone type.

Pipe Attraction Zone


The Pipe Attraction Zone models a volume that attracts pipes. It has a cost factor, which means
that routes that lie within the Pipe Attraction Zone are less expensive than equivalent routes
outside the zone. The Pipe Attraction Zone is similar to the Pipe Rack Zone in that it modifies
the result of the routing calculation by attracting pipes but has fewer rules for layout and for
joining and leaving the zone. For more information, see Pipe Attraction Zone Sheet in the
SmartPlant LayoutSpace Management Reference Data Guide. You can access this guide with
the Help > Printable Guides command in the Space Management task.

120 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

On Face - Defines on which of the six faces the pipe is to be routed as shown in the following
illustration:

In a Pipe Attraction Zone, the On Face property is not always obeyed if doing so will result in a
change in the pipe routing. In other words, the software will not add bends to the route in order
to force a pipe to run on the specified face. This behavior is in contrast to behavior of the On
Face property in a Pipe Rack Zone. As such, Intergraph recommends that the On Face property
always be defined for a Pipe Attraction Zone in order to avoid unpredictable behavior. If the
property is left undefined, the zone will select any one of the four candidate faces as an
appropriate default based on the Route Direction property. For example, if the Route Direction
property is set to East, the software can choose Top, Bottom, North, or South faces as the
default, whereas setting the Route Direction property to West can produce a different result.
Associated - Determines whether all pipes see the Pipe Attraction Zone as a candidate for
routing, or only those pipes that explicitly reference the zone. If the value of the property is set to
True, only those pipes with the Pipe Attraction Zone in their list of zones to use will do so. If the
value of the property is set to False, all pipes will evaluate the Pipe Attraction Zone for use in
routing.
Route Direction - Specifies the direction relative to the local coordinate system in which pipe
will be routed. The Route Direction property defines the axis of the routed pipe, so an East
value is the same as a West value, North is equal to South, and Up is equal to Down. It is
unrelated to the direction of the pipe as it is routed between its From and To connections. For
example, if a pipe is routed from West to East through a pipe attraction zone, the result is the
same whether the Route Direction property is set to East or West. Since pipes always run
parallel to one of the pipe attraction zone axes, the route direction in a skewed or
non-orthogonal rack is translated as the rack axis closest to the specified orthogonal axis. If a
rack is at 45 degrees to orthogonal, the software uses the longer of the two candidate axes.
Cost Factor - Specifies the cost factor applied to pipe that runs through the Pipe Attraction
Zone. Typically, the cost factor value is a number less than one. The lower the number, the
more the zone attracts pipe.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 121


Associating Volumes with Objects

Layout - Specifies how pipes are laid out.


 Normal - Pipe is laid out within the pipe zone. The pipe runs parallel to the Route Direction
property and is on the face specified by the On Face property. The Normal layout is the
default.
 Surface - Pipe is laid out on the outside surface of the zone, for example, when modeling a
floor or wall on which pipes run.
 WayPoint - A single pipe runs through the geometric center of the pipe zone. This mode is
used to cause a pipe to run through a particular point in space.

Pipe Avoidance Zone


The Pipe Avoidance Zone models a volume that the pipe can enter if it is essential, but will avoid
if possible. For example, it is not good practice for pipe to be placed within the immediate vicinity
of a tank, but some of the pipes must connect to nozzles on the tank.
Cost Factor - Specifies the cost penalty applied to pipe that runs in the Pipe Avoidance Zone.
Typically, the cost factor value is a number greater than one. The higher the number, the more
the zone repels pipe.

Pipe Connection Zone


Pipe Connection Zones define a volume at which a route can terminate. They may act as
obstruction zones (as defined by the Obstruction property) in addition to their special
connection properties.
Connection Face - Specifies on which face the connection is made. The End and Surface
values are intended for use with cylindrical connection zones, which support connection to the
ends or the curved surface of a cylinder.
Obstruction - Specifies whether the zone allows pipes to be routed through it (value = False) or
whether the zone allows pipes to be routed up to it, but not through it (value = True).

122 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Pipe Rack Zone


On Face - Defines on which of the six faces the pipe is to be routed as shown in the following
illustration:

Associated - Determines whether all pipes see the Pipe Rack Zone as a candidate for routing,
or only those pipes that explicitly reference the zone. If the value is set to True, only those pipes
with the Pipe Rack Zone in their list of zones to use will do so. If the value is set to False, all
pipes will evaluate the zone for use in routing.
Route Direction - Specifies the direction relative to the local coordinate system in which pipe
will be routed on a rack. The Route Direction property defines the axis of the routed pipe, so an
East value is the same as a West value, North is equal to South, and Up is equal to Down. It is
unrelated to the direction of the pipe as it is routed between its From and To connections. For
example, if a pipe is routed from West to East through a rack, the result is the same whether the
Route Direction property is set to East or West. Since pipes always run parallel to one of the
rack axes, the route direction in a skewed or non-orthogonal rack is translated as the rack axis
closest to the specified orthogonal axis. If a rack is at 45 degrees to orthogonal, the software
uses the longer of the two candidate axes.
Layout - Specifies how pipes are laid out.
 At Edge - Pipes are laid out in joining order starting at each edge and working inwards.
 Large Bore At Edge - Pipes are laid out in bore order starting at each edge and working
inwards.
 Spreadout - Pipes are laid out evenly across the rack.
 At Center - Pipes are laid out in joining order starting at the center of the rack and working
outwards.
 Large Bore At Center - Pipes are laid out with the largest bore at the center and then
working outwards.
 Straight Through - Pipes are laid out going straight through the rack. This option allows
modeling of wall and floor penetrations.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 123


Associating Volumes with Objects

Allowed Fluid Codes - Filters the pipes that can use the zone based on fluid type. Only the
fluid types you specify are permitted on the rack. If more than one fluid type is to be allowed, use
a comma or a space to separate them. For example, type Process,Steam.
Cost Factor - Displays the cost factor applied to pipe that runs on the rack. The software
calculates this value based on data you specify for properties in the Cost Estimation category.
Typically, the cost factor value is a number less than one. The lower the number, the more the
zone attracts pipe.

Position and Orientation


East - Displays the distance along the East-axis (X-axis) from the origin of the active coordinate
system to the origin of the local coordinate system on the volume.
North - Displays the distance along the North-axis (Y-axis) from the origin of the active
coordinate system to the origin of the local coordinate system on the volume.
Elevation - Displays the distance along the Elevation-axis (Z-axis) from the origin of the active
coordinate system to the origin of the local coordinate system on the volume.
Bearing - Displays the angle in the XY-plane between the volume's x-axis and the active
coordinate system Y-axis (North). Another way to describe bearing is the rotation of the volume
about its z-axis. The bearing direction moves clockwise from North, where North is 0 degrees.
Bearing is also known as compass heading. The bearing value is always positive, with a range
of 0 to 360 degrees.
Pitch - Displays the angle in the XZ-plane between the volume's x-axis and the active
coordinate system's X-axis. Another way to describe pitch is the rotation of the volume about its
y-axis. Pitch is limited to between -90 degrees and +90 degrees, with 0 as horizontal.
Roll - Displays the angle in the YZ-plane between the volume's z-axis and the active coordinate
system's Z-axis. Another way to describe roll is the rotation of the volume about its x-axis. The
roll is between 0 and 360 degrees and is measure clockwise if you are looking West.
The following category only appears when you select either Pipe Rack Zone or
Icarus Open Steel Zone in the Type list.

Cost Estimation
Displays properties required by Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator™ to compute a cost that is
based on Alias auto- routing.
Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator is a third-party software product that allows process
engineers to accurately evaluate the economic impact of their process designs.
Length - Specify the length.
Width - Specify the width.
Height - Specify the height.
Number of Stairways - Specify the number of stairways.
Grating Type - Specify the type of grating used in the zone.
Structural Steel Analysis - Specify the type of structural steel analysis.
Column Base End Condition - Specify the type of connection at the column base.
Distributed Load Per Level - Specify the distributed load per level.
Wind Force Adjustment - Specify the adjustment for wind force.
Seismic Force Adjustment - Specify the adjustment for seismic force.
The following Cost Estimation properties are only available when you select Pipe
Rack Zone in the Type list.
Pipe Rack Type - Specify the type of pipe rack.

124 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Concrete Type - Specify the type of concrete.


Number of Levels - Specify the number of levels.
Height First Level - Specify the height of the first level. The default measurement is in feet and
inches.
Number of Ladders - Specify the number of ladders.
Number of Braced Bays - Specify the number of braced bays.
Number of Beam Struts Per Pipe Level - Specify the number of beam struts on each pipe
level.
Number Catwalks - Specify the number of catwalks.
Catwalk Width - Specify the required width of the catwalk.
Main Bent Spacing - Specify the main bent spacing.
Third Column Option - Specify whether or not a third column is necessary. For a two-bay rack,
a third column is required.
Air Cooler Loading - Specify the maximum load for the air cooler.
Number of Beam Struts Per Column Line - Specify the number of beam struts for each
column line.
End Bent Exclusion - Specify whether or not to excluded end bents in the zone.
Minimum Beam Or Column Width - Specify the minimum width of the beam or column.
The following Cost Estimation properties are only available when you select
Icarus Open Steel Zone in the Type list.
Number of Floors - Specify the number of floors.
Bay Span - Specify the span of the bay.
Bay Width - Specify the width of the bay.
Floor Grate Percent Area - Specify the percent of the area through which you can route pipe.
Siding Percent Area - Specify the percent of the area through which you can route pipe.
Floor Slab Percent Area - Specify the percent of the area through which you can route pipe.
Slab Thickness - Specify the thickness of the slab.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 119)

Shape Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box)


Displays information about the primitive shape used as the basis for placing a space object. This
tab is only available for space objects created with Place Volume Using Primitive Shapes .
You can view an image of the selected shape on the bottom of the dialog box.

Standard
Shape - Specifies the shape. The list of available shapes is defined in the Equipment and
Furnishings reference data for designed equipment.
Property/Value Grid - Displays dimensional information for the currently selected shape. In the
space below the grid, you can view an image of the shape.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 119)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 125


Associating Volumes with Objects

Cross-Section Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box)


Displays information about the cross-section for a volume that was projected along a path. This
tab is only available for volumes created with Place Volume Along Path .

Standard
Cross-Section - Specifies the type of cross-section for the volume. You can either select a
standard cross-section defined in the reference data or select Sketch to draw your own
cross-section.
When a standard cross-sectional type is selected in the Cross-Section list, you can modify the
properties that are described later in this topic. When Sketch is selected in the Cross-Section
list, you can view each point, its coordinates, and its turn type in the table at the bottom of the
tab, but you cannot modify the data. For more information, see General Tab (Sketch Properties
Dialog Box).
Display Cross-Section Image - Displays the image associated with the standard
cross-sectional type in the reference data.
Cross-sectional images show the dimensions for the cross- sectional type, the default cardinal
points for the cross- sectional type, and the angle for the cross-section. The following graphic
contains the dimensions and cardinal point for an example cross-section:

If no image is associated with the cross-section and the selected cardinal point, Image Not
Available appears at the bottom of the tab.
A - G - Defines the dimensions for standard cross-sections. If an image is defined for the
cross-section in the reference data, you can see what each letter represents by clicking Display
Cross-Section Image .
Cardinality - Defines the point where you want the software to attach the cross-section to the
path. If you click Display Cross-Section Image to see a picture of the cross-section, you
can view where each cardinal point is located. The software automatically updates the display in
the model when you select a different cardinal point.
Rotation Angle - Defines the angle by which the cross-section is rotated about the path.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 119)

126 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Space Folder Properties Dialog Box


Sets options for a space folder.
General Tab (Space Folder Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
See Also
Create a Space Folder (on page 104)
Create Space Objects (on page 105)
Create Space Folder (on page 103)

General Tab (Space Folder Properties Dialog Box)


Sets general options for the selected space folder.

Standard
Name - Displays the name assigned by rule to the volume. You can enter a different name.
Space Folder - Specifies the parent to which the selected space belongs. The parent
determines the placement of the folder within the space hierarchy. Selecting More in the list
displays the Select Space Folder Dialog Box (on page 104).
See Also
Space Folder Properties Dialog Box (on page 127)

Edit volume properties


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In the model, click the space object with the properties that you want to edit.
You can also select a space object by clicking its name on the Space tab in the
Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Edit > Properties.
You can also click Volume Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.
4. On the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), click the General tab to edit general
information about the selected object:
 To edit the name, type a different name in the Name box.
 To change the type of volume, select a different type in the Type list.

 The Class box updates automatically based on the type that you select in the Type list.
 For drawing volumes, you can specify the type of volume during creation of the volume,
but not after.
5. To edit the location, select a different space folder in the Space folder list.
You can also modify the properties on the horizontal ribbon that appears when you
select the object.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 127


Associating Volumes with Objects

Modify cross-sectional properties for a volume


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. Select the volume for which you want to modify the cross-section.
You can modify the path for volumes created with Place Volume Along Path , but
not for volumes created with other commands.
3. On the ribbon, click Cross-Section .
4. On the Properties Dialog Box (on page 119), click the Cross-Section tab.
5. Make modifications to the cross-sectional properties.
As you make changes to the cross-sectional properties, the changes appear in
dynamics in the model.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Finish to apply the changes to the cross-section.

 If you sketch a cross-section, the properties for the cross-section include coordinates, turns,
and related turn values, if applicable.
 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section on the Volume Properties
dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the cross-sectional
sketch. For more information, see Modify a Sketched Cross-section (on page 118).

128 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Permission Groups and Routing


Several users in different permission groups can work together when routing if you know how
the software handles the different situations. Starting in version 6.0, Piping fully supports
different users, with different sets of privileges, working on different runs such as when working
in a Global Workshare Configuration.
Prior to version 6.0, pipe route legs could be shared between pipe runs. In version 6.0 and later,
the software creates an Intermediate End Feature (IEF) at the end of a pipe run connected to
another pipe run and creates a logical connection between the two IEFs/runs. The legs stop at
the IEF and are no longer shared between pipe runs. You do not need to create a separate
permission group for the pipe run and for the features of the pipe run. Everything can now be in
the same permission group.

Assignment of Permission Groups


The first thing to know is how permission groups are assigned:
 Objects that you create directly are assigned to the active permission group.
 Objects created automatically by the software are assigned a permission group determined
by an internal set of rules. The permission group assigned is not necessarily the active
permission group. Examples of automatically placed objects include connections and a pipe
automatically inserted when two touching valves are separated.
 Parts generated by features are assigned the permission group of the parent feature.
Remember, however, that runs can be in a different permission group than its collective
features and parts.
 End features use the permission group of the run to which they belong.
 Connections use the permission group of the parts to which they are connected. If the
connection is between parts with different permission groups, then the permission group to
which the user has write access is used. If the connection is between an equipment nozzle
and a route part, the route part permission group is used for the connection.
 Piping connection objects (welds, bolt sets, gaskets, clamps) use the permission group of
the connection that generated it.

Systems and Permission Groups


A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you are
modifying the definition of the parent system. Therefore, you must have write access to the
parent system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system. For example, to create
a pipe run, you need write access to the parent pipeline. However, you do not need access to
the system to which the pipeline belongs.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission
groups at the host site. The sub- system requirement to have write access to its parent system
is not possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site, and the
parent system's permission group is created at the host site.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 129


Associating Volumes with Objects

For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
called "Pipe Rack 100" and its controlling permission group in Houston. You assign user John,
who works in London, write access. During the workshare replication process, the "Pipe Rack
100" system and permission group is "duplicated" in London. In London, John can add columns,
beams, braces and whatever else he wants to the "Pipe Rack 100" system because John was
given write access to the system's permission group in Houston. John cannot delete or change
any of the properties of the "Pipe Rack 100" system in London because the host site, Houston,
owns it. He can only "add" objects to the system. If John were to travel to Houston and log on
there, he could delete or change any of the properties of the "Pipe Rack 100" system because
the Houston host site owns it.

Example Configuration A
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on the same run with exclusive access.
John is responsible for part of the run, and Peter is responsible for the other part of the run.
Neither John nor Peter should be able to modify the work of the other person. The administrator
should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create three different permission groups: PG-Run, PG-John, and PG-Peter. Both John and
Peter should have full control access to PG-Run. John should have full control access to
PG- John while Peter should have read-only access to PG- John. Peter should have full
control access to PG- Peter while John should have read-only access to PG- Peter.
The run should be created using the PG-Run permission group. When John works on his parts
of the run, he should use PG-John as the active permission group. When Peter works on his
parts of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission group. The two halves of the
run should connect at a component such as a valve (piping) or a union (electrical).
For example, John routes his part of the run, places a flange, and then places a gate valve.
Peter then places a flange manually connecting to the open port of the gate valve, and then
continues his part of the run.

Example Configuration B
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different but in-line connected runs
with exclusive access. For example, John places an elbow, a straight piece, and a union, then
stops. Peter connects to the open port of the union, and then continues routing. The
administrator should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create two different permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter. John should have full
control access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access to PG-John. Similarly,
Peter should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access
to PG-Peter.
John should create the run using the PG-John permission group and route his part of the run.
When Peter works on his part of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission
group. The Intermediate End Features will handle the connection between the two parts of the
run.

130 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Associating Volumes with Objects

Example Configuration C
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different runs connected by
branching components such as a tee. The administrator should configure the permission groups
as follows:
 Create two permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter. John should have full control
access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access to PG-John. Similarly, Peter
should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access to
PG-Peter.
John creates an initial header run using PG-John as the active permission group and routes it
as needed. Peter now wants to branch from John's run. Peter sets PG-Peter as the active
permission group and selects the header in John's run from which to branch. Instead of creating
the header component (such as a tee), the software generates a To Do List item for John.
When John updates the out-of-date To Do List item, the software modifies the header to add
the tee, and then generates a To Do List item for Peter.
When Peter updates his out-of-date To Do List item, the software fixes the branch leg (the end
of the branch leg is adjusted to the tee port). This is called a double hand-shaking mechanism.

Create a Pipeline System


In the Systems and Specifications task:
1. Click Task > Systems and Specifications.
2. In the tree, select the system in which you want to create the pipeline system.
3. From the ribbon, select New Pipeline System .
4. Type a description for the pipeline system.
5. Specify a fluid requirement and fluid type for the pipeline.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the new pipeline system in the tree, and then right-click and select Properties.
8. Change any properties of the system as needed.
In the Piping task:
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select All in the Locate Filter.
3. In the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the parent to the pipeline system that you are
creating.
4. Click New System > New Pipeline on the pop-up menu.
5. Type a description for the pipeline system.
6. Specify a fluid requirement and fluid type for the pipeline.
7. Click OK.
8. Right-click on the new pipeline system in the Workspace Explorer, and then select
Properties.
9. Change any additional properties as needed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 131


Associating Volumes with Objects

Create a Piping System


In the Systems and Specifications task:
1. Click Task > Systems and Specifications.
2. In the tree, select the system in which you want to create the piping system.
3. From the ribbon, select New Piping System .
4. Select the new system in the tree, and then right-click and select Properties.
5. Change any properties of the system as needed.
In the Piping task:
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select All in the Locate Filter.
3. In the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the parent to the piping system that you are
creating.
4. Click New System > New Piping System on the pop-up menu.
5. Right-click on the new piping system in the Workspace Explorer, and then select
Properties.
6. Change any additional properties as needed.

132 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 13

Route Pipe
Creates, models, and extends pipe runs quickly and precisely. Pipe runs may be straight or
circular, and, in general, behave the same way. All pipe run features and components are driven
by constraints, piping specifications, and catalogs.

By default, the software uses fast mode to dynamically display a pipe run as you define the
route. When in fast mode, the software does not render elbows or turns during the dynamic
display; instead, the software displays the elbows and turns after you define the pipe run
location. You cannot route a non-radial branch while in fast mode. Press SHIFT+F to turn off fast
mode.
The Route Pipe command also works with the Insert Split and Insert Component
commands to add features while routing. After placing the feature, such as a gate valve, the
route command automatically restarts from the open port of the inserted feature. Route Pipe
also uses the concept of routing on a plane to enable the quick, precise creation of pipe runs.
The Route Pipe command supports the following:
 Routing using an existing pipe run
 Routing using a newly created pipe run
 Routing using a pipe run defined in the P&ID design basis (if P&ID design basis data is
available)
 Routing to and from an end feature
 Routing to and from an equipment nozzle
 Routing to and from a straight feature (creating a branch)
 Inserting a component while routing
 Inserting a split while routing
When routing any pipe run, the major steps include selecting a starting point, defining the
characteristics of the run (nominal pipe diameter, piping specification, options), routing the run
point-by-point, and selecting the end point of the run. To route an arc pipe run, you include a
center point, as well.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 133


Route Pipe

Routing a Circular or Arc Pipe


You use the Route Pipe command ribbon to model arc pipes, such as might be needed in gas
turbines or in the nuclear industry for carrying fluids. You can place a circular ring or route out of
bends using branch fittings, components or stub-ins.
When the curve leg and normal leg connect, Route Pipe places a new zero-angle turn called a
connector. The curve leg can hold all the route pipe features except straight and end legs. If the
curve leg is a full ring, then it can only have curve and along leg features on the leg.

A curve leg with a single curve feature may be placed, but it is not logged in the To-Do list. You
will need to manually insert the split point.

Routing To or From a Straight Feature, End Feature, or Nozzle


In addition to the basic functions of creating new runs or extending previous runs, the Route
Pipe command supports routing to or from straight features, end features, and nozzles.
When routing a pipe run, you can define the run starting point either before or after clicking the
Route Pipe command. In either case, if a feature was selected, the command determines the
default working plane based on that feature. Additionally, the command determines whether to
continue the pipe run associated with that feature or to create a new run. The software
automatically generates any parts required for the connection, including branch components.
This functionality allows you to easily extend or branch out of a previously modeled pipe run.

Preventing Skewed, Non-Square, and Non- Plumb Piping


Occasionally, you might accidentally model piping that is slightly askew, out of plumb, or not
square and not notice the error. If you continue routing, it results in the propagation of the
original error to other runs. To help you avoid this problem, the software performs these checks:
 Major Axis Check - The software checks if newly created legs or modified legs are slightly
off alignment of a major coordinate system axis. For non-sloped pipes, the software displays
a message if the leg is between 0.05° and 3.00° off the major axis. For sloped pipes, the
range is 1.50° and 4.50 °. Both ranges can be customized by editing the registry in your
computer. Contact Intergraph support for more information, http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com).
 Square Check - When you model a leg that connects to an existing leg, the software checks
the angle between the two legs and displays a message when the angle is between 87.00°
and 89.95°, or between 90.05° and 93.00° for non-sloped pipes. For sloped pipes, the
ranges are 85.50° and 88.50°, and 91.50° and 94.50°. You can customize these ranges also
by editing the registry in your computer.
 Small Turn Feature Check - The software anticipates that angles equal to or less than 0.5°
are the result of a "fit-up" and, as such, do not need a turn feature. Be aware that even
though a turn feature is not modeled, the angle between the legs is not modified and
remains as you modeled it.

134 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Route Pipe Ribbon


Sets options for routing a pipe.

Normal or Straight Pipe

Properties - Displays the Route Pipe Settings dialog box. For more information, see New
Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 154).
Straight Routing - Click to model a straight pipe.
Arc Routing - Click to model an arc pipe.
Start Route - Click to specify the starting location for the pipe run. The starting point can be
an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space.
End Route - Click to specify the end point of the current pipe run leg. The end point can be
an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space. If the end point is a point in space, then that point serves
as the starting point for the next leg of the pipe run.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays existing pipe runs along with the <New Pipe Run>, <New/Continue Run>,
<Select from P&ID>, <Select Graphically>, and More options. Select the pipe run to route or
select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. If a new pipe run is created, all runs
associated with the parent pipeline selected on the New Pipe Run dialog box appear in the list.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 154).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks if the run already exists in the SmartPlant Layout model. If
the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New Pipe Run
dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the defaults.
When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 135


Route Pipe

Select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent. For more
information, see Select Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 162).
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle box.
Angle - Enter or select an angle for the current route segment. You can enter any value needed,
provided it does not conflict with the defined specifications. If the Angle Lock is unlocked, this
box displays a dynamic readout of the current bend angle. If you have No Plane selected,
you can only lock the angle to 0 and 90 degrees.
Turn Option - Select the option code associated with the turn component that you want to use
while routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification and shared
by all of the short codes that can be placed automatically while routing appear. Only the options
available for all short codes available during routing are listed. If pipe spec writer only added a
second choice for 90 deg direction change, then route would not display it in the drop down list.
Lock Length - Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length - If Lock Length is locked, enter or select a length for the current route segment. If
Lock Length is unlocked, this box displays the length of the current pipe run leg being placed.
Straight Option - Select the option code associated with the pipe that you want to use while
routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification appear.
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 160).
Lock Slope - Locks or unlocks the Slope box.
Slope - Displays the defined minimum slope for the run. This option is only enabled when you
defined a slope on the New Pipe Run dialog box. If a value greater than or equal to the
minimum slope of the run is entered, it is applied only to the leg currently being routed. After the
leg is modeled, the value of the Slope box reverts to the minimum slope defined for the pipe
run. You cannot enter a slope value that is less than the minimum slope specified for the pipe
run except for 0 to route a horizontal leg in the pipe run. Select Use Default Slope to
automatically change the slope value to match the Minimum Slope property of the pipe run.
You can change the units of measure for the slope using Tools > Options > Units of Measure.

Circular or Arc Pipe

Properties - Displays the Route Pipe Settings dialog box. For more information, see New
Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 154).
Straight Routing - Click to model a straight pipe.
Arc Routing - Click to model an arc pipe.
Arc Start Point - Click to specify the starting location for the arc pipe run. The starting point
can be an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space.
Arc Center Point - Click to specify the center point for the arc pipe run.
Arc End Point - Click to specify the end point for the arc pipe run. The end point can be an
equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of another
pipe run, or a point in space. If the end point is a point in space, then that point serves as the
starting point for the next leg of the pipe run.
Finish - Click to indicate that the points are set and the arc may be routed.

136 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. The arc and straight
options are the same.
Run - Displays existing pipe runs along with the <New Pipe Run>, <New/Continue Run>,
<Select from P&ID>, <Select Graphically>, and More options. Select the pipe run to route or
select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. If a new pipe run is created, all runs
associated with the parent pipeline selected on the New Pipe Run dialog box appear in the list.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 154).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks if the run already exists in the SmartPlant Layout model. If
the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New Pipe Run
dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the defaults.
When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.
Select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent. For more
information, see Select Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 162).
Lock Arc radius - Locks or unlocks the Arc radius box.
Arc radius - Enter or select the radius of the arc pipe. Select Maintain Same Radius to route
an arc pipe from the existing arc maintaining the same radius. This option appears only when
you route from an existing arc.
Lock Arc Angle - Locks or unlocks the Arc angle box.
Arc Angle - Enter or select an angle for the arc segment. You can enter any value needed,
provided it does not conflict with the defined specifications. If the Arc Angle Lock is unlocked,
this box displays a dynamic readout of the current arc angle. If you have No Plane selected,
you can only lock the angle to 0 and 90 degrees.
Lock Arc Length - Locks or unlocks the Arc length box.
Arc Length - If Lock Arc Length is locked, enter or select a length for the current route
segment. If Lock Arc Length is unlocked, this box displays the length of the current pipe run leg
being placed.
Straight option - Select the option code associated with the pipe that you want to use while
routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification appear.

Edit Pipe Straight Feature Ribbon


Displays options for editing a straight feature.
Properties - Displays the Pipe Straight Feature Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 219).
Move From - Click to specify the starting location of the move vector. If you do not define a
starting point, the software assumes that the current location of the object is the starting point.
Move To - Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 137


Route Pipe

Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected feature is associated. All other
pipe runs associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can
be selected if needed. Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view,
the Workspace Explorer, or the P&ID View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a
different pipeline.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected pipe. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other pipes defined in the piping specification for the current
nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected pipe with one of a
different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected pipe. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code
selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Lock Length - Defines whether or not the length of the selected pipe should remain constant
while moving.
When locked , the software automatically modifies the turn points, along with the length and
angle of adjacent straight features, to remain connected to the moved leg. The length of the
moved leg does not change.
When not locked , the software extends or shortens the associated legs to connect with the
new position of the moved pipe. The length of the moved leg can change. Any component, such
as a valve, on the moved pipe maintains its relative position from the pipe ends.
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are editing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint.
Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more information on setting the
reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 160).
Slope - Displays the slope of the selected straight feature. This option displays only for sloped
pipe runs.

138 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Edit Pipe End Feature Ribbon


Displays options for editing an end component, such as a cap, blind flange, or a pipe end.
Properties - Displays the Pipe End Feature Properties dialog box. For more information,
see Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 207).
Move From - Click to specify the starting location of the move vector. If you do not define a
starting point, the software assumes that the current location of the object is the starting point.
Move To - Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected end feature is associated.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected end. The Type list also contains the
short codes associated with any other end components defined in the piping specification for the
current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected end
component with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected end. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. Selecting another
entry from the Option list updates the object accordingly.
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle box.
Angle - Displays the angle of any turn or branch component that is located at the other end of
the leg with which the selected end feature is associated. If no turn or branch exists at the other
end of the leg, then this box is disabled. Changing the angle value adjusts the position of the
selected end feature to achieve the specified angle and then locks that angle value. When this
box is unlocked, the value updates dynamically as the selected end component is moved.
Lock Length - Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length - Displays the length of the run leg connected to the end being edited. Entering a value
in this box adjusts the position of the selected end feature to achieve the specified length and
then locks that length value. When this box is unlocked, the value updates dynamically as the
selected end component is moved.
®
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 160).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 139


Route Pipe

Lock Slope - Locks or unlocks the Slope box. This option displays only for sloped pipe runs.
Slope - Displays the defined minimum slope for the end feature. Select Use Default Slope to
automatically change the slope value to match the Minimum Slope property of the pipe run.
You can change the units of measure for the slope using Tools > Options > Units of Measure.
This option displays only for sloped pipe runs.

Edit Branch Feature Ribbon


Displays options for branches placed in the model.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected branch. For more
information, see Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 204).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes that the current location of the branch is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected branch. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other branches defined in the piping specification for the
current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected branch
with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected branch. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. Selecting another
entry from the Option list updates the object accordingly.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run to which the branch is associated. All other pipe runs
associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can be
selected if needed. Select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. Select <Select
Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the P&ID
View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a different pipeline.
Angle 1 - Specifies the angle of the branch.
Angle 2 - Specifies the angle of the turn or branch feature located at the other end of the branch
leg. If this box is blank, there is no turn or branch feature located at the end of the branch leg.

Figure 1: Locations of Angle 1 and Angle 2

Flip - Orients the branch so that the selected port is located at the insertion point. If a lateral,
tee, or other tee-type branch is located along the length of a pipe or between two components,
only the in-line ports of the component are available when flipping. However, if the same
component is located at the end of a pipe run, all component ports are available.

140 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Rotate - Select to rotate the branch about the pipe interactively. This option is available only
when nothing has been connected to the branch port.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the branch rotated about the pipe. This option is
available only when nothing has been connected to the branch port.
Branch Position - Select the position of the branch centerline relative to the header centerline.
Select Radial to place the branch such that its centerline intersects the header centerline. Select
Non-Radial to place the branch such that its center line does not intersect the header
centerline. If you select Non-Radial, you can specify the distance the branch centerline is offset
from the header centerline up to being tangent to the outside diameter of the header.

Figure 2: Radial and Non-Radial Positions

Edit Turn Feature Ribbon


Displays options for turns or bends placed in the model.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected turn. For more information,
see Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 222).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes that the current location of the turn is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the turn. Six options are available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected turn is associated. All other
pipe runs associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can
be selected if needed. Select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. Select
<Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or
the P&ID View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a different pipeline.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 141


Route Pipe

Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected turn. The Type list also contains the
short codes associated with any other turns defined in the piping specification for the current
nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected turn with one of a
different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected turn. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code
selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Flip - Orients the turn so that the other turn port is connected to the end of the run. This
option is available only when a turn is connected to the end of a run and no other part has been
connected to the other turn port.
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle 2 and Angle 3 boxes. Locking the corresponding
angle value creates a constraint along which the selected turn angle can be moved.
Angle 2 - Specifies the angle of the turn feature located at the end of one associated leg. If this
box is blank, there is no turn feature located at the end of the leg. When you select this box, the
software highlights the Angle 2 turn feature in the model. Although this value can be changed,
the location of the corresponding turn cannot. Modification of this value repositions the selected
turn until the specified angle is achieved.
Angle 1 - Specifies the angle of the turn that you are editing. Modification of this value
repositions the selected turn until the specified angle is achieved.
Angle 3 - Specifies the angle of the turn feature located at the end of one associated leg. If this
box is blank, there is no turn feature located at the end of the leg. When you select this box, the
software highlights the Angle 2 turn feature in the model. Although this value can be changed,
the location of the corresponding turn cannot. Modification of this value repositions the selected
turn until the specified angle is achieved.

Figure 3: Locations of Angles 1, 2, and 3

Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 160).
Modify Slope - Activates the Modify Slope dialog box, with which you can modify the slope
of the legs on either side of the selected turn. For more information, see Modify Slope Dialog
Box (on page 162).

142 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Edit Pipe Part Ribbon


Displays options for editing the selected object. This ribbon displays when you set the Locate
Filter to Piping Parts, and select a part in the model.
Properties - Displays the properties dialog box for the selected object.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected object is associated. You
cannot change the run.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected object. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other objects defined in the piping specification for the
current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected object with
one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected object. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code
selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Name - Specifies the object name. You can enter a new name if needed.
Tag - Specifies the engineering tag for the object.
Base/Mating Part - Displays whether the selected object is a base part or a mating part. If the
object is a mating part, you can use this option to change the object to a base part. Use caution
however, because after a mating part has been changed to a base part, it cannot be changed
back to a mating part again.

Edit Surface Mount Pipe Component Ribbon


Displays options for surface mount pipe components placed in the model.
Properties - Opens a dialog box with properties for the selected surface mount pipe
component. Allows you to review the properties of the selected component and change the
value assigned to a property.
Move From - Defines the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting point, the
current location of the end feature is assumed to be the starting point.
Move To - Defines the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Specifies the name of the pipe run on which the component is placed.
Type - Displays the tag associated with the selected component. In addition, the Type list
contains the tags associated with other surface mount components. Selecting an entry from the
Type list replaces the selected component with one of a different tag.
Rotate - Rotates the surface-mounted component about the pipe interactively around the
feature axis.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 143


Route Pipe

Angle - Defines the angle for rotating the component around the pipe.

What do you want to do?


 Create a new pipe run (on page 144)
 Create an arc pipe run (on page 145)
 Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run (on page 145)
 Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors (on page 146)
 Place components while routing pipes (on page 147)
 Place splits while routing pipes (on page 147)
 Route a sloped pipe run (on page 148)
 Route a multi-sloped pipe run (on page 148)
 Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location (on page 149)
 Route a pipe run at specified distance (on page 149)
 Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction (on page 150)
 Route a pipe run with an offset (on page 150)
 Copy a pipe run (on page 151)
 Extend an existing pipe run (on page 151)
 Extend an existing arc pipe (on page 151)
 Merge pipe runs (on page 152)
 Choose a working plane (on page 153)
 Select pipe run settings (on page 153)
 Change the flow direction of a pipe run (on page 154)

Create a new pipe run


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, a tap, a branch port, or a point
along a straight feature, the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a
name, the software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 153)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.

144 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

6. Select the ending point of the pipe leg. Right-click to end a pipe run.

 You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting the
run name from the list of available runs.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Create an arc pipe run


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Arc Routing on the horizontal ribbon.
3. Click Start Point and click to set the run starting point.
4. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, enter a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a
name, the software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 153)
5. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
If you are connecting the arc pipe to an existing run, select its name from the Run box.
6. Enter the Arc radius in the corresponding box.
7. Click Center Point , and click to set the run center point.
8. Click End Point , and click to set the run end point.
9. Enter the Arc angle in the corresponding box.
10. Click Finish to place the arc pipe.

Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run


1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you
want to route. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you want
to route.
3. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
4. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
5. Select the run to route from the P&ID drawing.
6. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given. This step saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.

 If process data was not defined on the P&ID, then you must manually enter a
temperature and pressure.
 You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators when
defining your pipe run.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 145


Route Pipe

8. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run that does not terminate
in a nozzle or branch.
Your plant must be registered with the SmartPlant integrated environment to use this
procedure. For more information, see the Project Management User's Guide.

Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors


1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&IDs that contain the runs to route. You can
skip this step if the P&IDs have already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID that contains the first part of the run to
route.
3. Select All or Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
6. From the P&ID drawing, select the run to route.
7. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given. This step saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
8. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
9. Right-click to end a pipe run in space (not terminated on a nozzle or branch).
After routing, notice that the correlation color in the P&ID Viewer does not show a
data match. This mismatch is because the second part of the run noted through the off-page
connector has not yet been routed and correlated. The off-page connector displays the
corresponding P&ID to find the matching connector.
10. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the corresponding P&ID noted by the previous
drawing.
11. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
12. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
13. Select the other side of the run to route from the corresponding P&ID.
14. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given, which saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
15. Route the run to the end of the first pipe run. Because the software places a weld when the
two ends are connected, you should choose an appropriate location along the pipe run for
the weld caused by the off-page connector. This prevents unnecessary welds from being
created.

146 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Place components while routing pipes


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, or a point along a straight feature,
the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a
name, the software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 153)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to begin routing your pipe run.
6. Click Insert Component when you want to insert a component.
Insert a component (on page 183)
7. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting
the run name from the list of available runs.

Place splits while routing pipes


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, or a point along a straight feature,
the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
3. On the Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a name, the
software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 153)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to begin routing your pipe run.
6. Click Insert Component when you want to insert a component.
Insert a component (on page 183)
7. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting
the run name from the list of available runs.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 147


Route Pipe

Route a sloped pipe run


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point in an elevation view.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, select the parent Pipeline.
4. In the Name box, type a name for the pipe run. If you do not enter a name, the software
automatically generates a name.
5. Select the Minimum Slope box, and then enter the slope for the pipe run. For example, 2
deg or 0.5in / 1.0ft.
6. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify if you are routing from the high point or
the low point of the pipe run.
8. Click OK in the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
9. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
10. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.

 You can unlock the slope on the ribbon to temporarily override the slope. For example, you
will need to unlock the slope to model a vertical drop in the pipe run.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a multi-sloped pipe run


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point in an elevation view.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, select the parent Pipeline.
4. In the Name box, type a name for the pipe run. If you do not enter a name, the software
automatically generates a name.
5. Select the Minimum Slope box, and then enter the slope for the pipe run. For example, 2
deg or 0.5in / 1.0ft.
6. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify if you are routing from the high point or
the low point of the pipe run.
8. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, select Run contains multiple slope
orientation to indicate that the pipe run will slope both up and down.
9. Click OK on the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
10. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
11. When you are finish routing in that particular direction (for example, sloping down).
Right-click to end a pipe run.

148 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

12. Click Route Pipe again.


13. In the Run box on the ribbon, select <New/Continue Run>.
14. Select the pipe end feature where you stopped in step 11.
15. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify the other direction.
16. Click OK on the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
17. Select point to define the route of your pipe run.
18. Repeat steps 11 through 17 until you have completed the pipe run route.
The Run contains multiple slope orientations option on the Specify Slope
Direction dialog box indicates that the pipe run slopes both up and down. After you specify that
a pipe run has multiple slope orientations, you cannot clear the selection. You should only route
pipe runs with multiple slope orientations when it is absolutely required. In addition, pipe runs
with multiple slope orientations may behave unexpectedly during modification operations.

Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location


1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the coordinate system that contains the location to which you want to route.
3. Select the Rectangular Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. Select the Set Target to Origin option on the PinPoint ribbon to move the PinPoint
target to the specified coordinate system's origin.
8. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation coordinates to which you
want to route.
9. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a pipe run at specified distance


1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the Relative Tracking option on the PinPoint ribbon.
3. Select the Rectangular Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation distance (from the PinPoint
target) to route the pipe run.
8. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point. The software moves the
PinPoint target to the new location.
9. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation distance to route the pipe
run.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 149


Route Pipe

10. Continue defining points as needed.


11. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. You do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction


1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the Relative Tracking option on the PinPoint ribbon.
3. Select the Spherical Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the absolute distance and direction to route.
8. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point. The software moves the
PinPoint target to the new location.
9. Continue defining points as needed.
10. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a pipe run with an offset


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.
3. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
4. From the Offset option, select Set Offset Reference.
5. Select the option to use from the Measured from field.
6. Type the offset distance to use in the Offset box.
7. Click OK on the Set Offset Reference dialog box.
8. Select the appropriate route plane. The offset glyph will not appear if you do not set a plane.
9. Move the cursor over the object in the model from which you want to measure the offset
until the object is added to the SmartSketch locate list. This glyph appears.

10. Move the cursor until the offset line and glyph appear, and then click to route the pipe
run.
11. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. You do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

150 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Copy a pipe run


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to copy.
4. Click Edit > Copy.
5. Select an origin point (a "from" point) for the copied objects.
6. Click Edit > Paste.
7. Clear the Paste in place option if it is selected.
8. Identify a location in the model for the copied pipe run.
If you position an end of the copied pipe run so that it touches a pipe run end or nozzle,
the system automatically connects the two.

Extend an existing pipe run


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the end feature from which to extend the pipe run.
3. Route the pipe run as needed.

Extend an existing arc pipe


1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Arc Routing to change the route mode from straight to arc.
3. Select the end feature from which to extend the arc pipe run.
4. Select a center point to specify the direction and normal for the arc.
5. Enter the arc radius. If you need to route the arc with the same radius, select Maintain
Same Radius in the Arc Radius drop-down list.
The center point is adjusted according to the radius value.
6. Select the end point.
7. In the Arc Angle, key in the required angle.
8. Route the arc pipe as needed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 151


Route Pipe

Merge pipe runs


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the end feature of the pipe run you want to merge (delete).

4. Press and hold the SHIFT key.


5. Select the end feature at the other end of the pipe run you want to merge.
The software automatically selects all the features between the two features that you
selected.

6. In the Run box on the ribbon, select <Select Graphically>.

152 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

7. In a graphic view, select the pipe run to which you want the selected pipe features assigned.
The software re-assigns the selected pipe features to the newly identified pipe run.

8. Select Piping Runs in the locate filter.


9. In the Workspace Explorer, find the now empty pipe run and delete it.
If other objects, such as pipe supports, are still assigned to the "empty" pipe run (the
run with no piping features), you will need to move these item to the merged pipe run prior to
deleting the empty pipe run.
If the flow direction of the newly merged pipe run is corrupt, you can use the
ValidateFlowDirCmd.ValidateFlowDir custom command to search for and fix corrupt flow
directions in your model. If the issue persists, then you can enable the
CheckFlowDirectionConsistency registry entry for further validation. In case of flow direction
inconsistency a warning message is displayed. Contact support with this message.

Choose a working plane


1. Click Plane on the ribbon.
2. Select the routing plane for your pipe run.

 When you select a routing plane, the software highlights the plane in the model.
 You also can press CTRL-1, CTRL-2, CTRL-3, CTRL-4, CTRL-5, and CTRL-6 to select a
working plane.

Select pipe run settings


1. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, choose the pipeline for the new run in the Pipeline box.
The Pipeline box lists up to the last ten selected pipelines. Choosing the More option
at the bottom of the list allows you to browse all pipelines in the model.
2. Optionally, in the Name box, type the name of the new pipe run that you are creating.
3. Set the specification of the new pipe run in the Specification box.
4. In the Nominal Diameter box, select the NPD for the pipe run.
5. Set other pipe run properties as needed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 153


Route Pipe

6. Click OK to return to the Route Pipe command.

 Use the Category option to view more properties that you can set for the pipe run.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Change the flow direction of a pipe run


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run for which you want to change the flow direction.
4. Click one of the flow direction indicators that appear on the pipe run.
5. Select a new flow direction on the Flow dialog box.

 The flow directional indicators are listed below:


Bi-directional
Upstream
Downstream
No flow
Undefined
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit the flow direction property of a run.

New Pipe Run Dialog Box


Creates a new pipe run in your model using properties that you specify. You can access the
New Pipe Run dialog box by going to the Piping task, selecting the Route Pipe command,
and then selecting <New Pipe Run> from the Run option on the ribbon bar.
Defaults for the new pipe run can be inherited from the pipe run you are connecting to, from a
P&ID in an integrated environment, or from the grandparent piping system default properties
values as defined in the Systems and Specifications task.
Pipe run properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Testing,
Temperature and Pressure, Surface Treatment and Coating, Insulation and Tracing, and
Responsibility. You can select the category that you want to define values for by using the
Category option.

Property Defaults Source


These four buttons indicate and control the default property values for the new pipe run. When a
button is active and pressed, the defaults from that button are being used. You can press a
different active button to use the defaults from that button. If a button is disabled, then no default
properties for that button are available for use. Default property values from the design basis
have the highest priority.
Piping System - Default properties on the parent piping system are used.
Pipeline System - Default properties on the parent pipeline system are used.

154 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Pipe Run - Default properties from an existing pipe run are used.
Last Used - Default properties that you used to place the last pipe run will be used for this
pipe run.

Standard
Pipeline - Select the pipeline system to which you want the pipe run to belong. The last pipeline
system that you selected is the default. Select More to display all defined pipeline systems. You
can create a new pipeline in the Systems and Specifications task.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run. The pipe run name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you specify a name in this box, the software automatically sets the Name Rule box
to User Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to name this pipe run. You can select one of the listed
rules or specify the pipe run name yourself in the Name box.
Specification - Select the pipe specification that you want to control this pipe run. Only those
pipe specifications that are allowed in the pipeline that you selected appear. You assign pipe
specifications to pipeline systems in the System and Specifications task. You define pipe
specifications in the reference data. See the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Nominal Diameter - Select the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) for the pipe run. The pipe
specification controls the available NPDs in this list. If you select an equipment nozzle as the
starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the NPD of the nozzle as the
NPD of the pipe run. You can select the NPD units to display on a session file basis using the
Tools > Options command on the Units of Measure tab.
Flow Direction - Select the flow direction for the pipe run. If you select an equipment nozzle as
the starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the flow direction of the
nozzle as the flow direction of the pipe run.
Minimum Slope - Displays the slope for the pipe run. You can specify the slope as a ratio, a
percentage, or in degrees.
 As a ratio, if a run drops 1/4" for every foot of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
1/4"/1'-0".
 As a percentage, if a run drops 1" for every 10" of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
10%.
 In degrees, a five-degree slope can be specified as 5deg.
Slope Direction - Displays the direction type of the pipe run slope. If it is set to Single, the pipe
run slopes either up or down. You can change this to Multiple if needed. If it is set to Multiple,
the pipe run can slope both up and down. You cannot change this setting back to Single once
Multiple is selected.
Schedule Override - Displays the thickness override for parts in the pipe run. If the piping
specification rules do not allow you to override components, then the software disables this
option.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipe run has been correlated to a pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Displays if the pipe run is required to be correlated to a P&ID pipe run.
Select Correlate object if the pipe run has a correlating pipe run in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the pipe run does not have a correlating pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Displays if the component is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the topology mismatch of components can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the data and topology mismatches of components can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 155


Route Pipe

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.

Temperature and Pressure


If service limits have been defined, then you must define one set of pressure/temperature
values (Design Maximum Temperature and Design Maximum Pressure, for example) before
you can place the object. The software does not prevent you from defining testing temperatures
and pressures that exceed the defined service limits.
Design Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum operating pressure. Include the
pressure unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this
value.
Testing Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Design Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum operating pressure. Include the pressure
unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.

156 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 157


Route Pipe

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Select the insulation specification to use. Select More to choose an
insulation specification allowed for the system. You assign which insulation specifications are
available in which systems in the System and Specifications task.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the purpose of the insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference
data.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Material box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the insulation material to use.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated
or a specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the
insulation thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the pipe run is heat-traced. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.

158 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing the weld on the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.

How the Software Evaluates Defaults

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 159


Route Pipe

Set Offset Reference Dialog Box


Sets options for reference offsets.
Offset Reference Type - Select the offset type you want to use.
 External - Route a pipe a specified distance from another object, such as another pipe
running parallel to the one you are placing.
 Cardinal Point - Route a pipe by the top, sides, bottom, or invert elevation of the pipe
instead of the pipe centerline. You must use Tools > Pinpoint and lock the plane when
using this reference type.
Include Insulation Thickness - Select this option to include the pipe's insulation thickness
when calculating the cardinal point offset. Clear this option to have the cardinal point be the
edge of the pipe and ignore the insulation thickness. This option is only available with Offset
Reference Type is set to Cardinal Point.
If the referenced object is planar surface (such as a slab) or a linear element (such as a
structural beam), then the offset distance is measured from the surface or line to the selected
reference plane (for example, the east/west plane ) on which the pipe is being routed.

Offset - Type the distance that you want to offset. You can turn off the offset option by selecting
<Disabled>.

160 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Measured From - Select the object from which you want to measure the offset. You can select
from:
 Centerline - Select this option if you want to measure the offset from the centerline of a pipe
run.
 Pipe Surface - Select this option if you want to measure the offset from the outside surface
of a pipe run.
 Insulation Surface - Select this option if you want to measure from the outside insulation
surface.
 Largest Surface - Select this option if you want to measure from the object that has the
greatest diameter on the pipe run. The object could be the pipe surface, insulation surface, a
flange, a valve, or any other pipe part.
 Staggered - Select this option to measure from the largest object on the pipe that you are
routing to the largest surface on the pipe that you are referencing. Use this option when you
want to get pipe centerlines as close as possible by staggering the location of split flanges.
See Also
Route a Pipe Run with an Offset (on page 150)

Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box


Defines the slope direction of a new pipe run and whether the pipe run can have multiple slope
orientations (slope both up and down in the same pipe run).

High Point - Select this option to indicate that the pipe run end point that you just identified is
the highest point on the pipe run.
Low Point - Select this option to indicate that the pipe run end point that you just identified is the
lowest point on the pipe run.
Run contains multiple slope orientation - Indicates that the pipe run will slope both up and
down. After you specify that a pipe run has multiple slope orientations, you cannot clear the
selection.
You should only route pipe runs with multiple slope orientations when it is absolutely
required.
See Also
Route a Multi-Sloped Pipe Run (on page 148)
Route a Sloped Pipe Run (on page 148)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 161


Route Pipe

Modify Slope Dialog Box


Modifies the slope of a pipe run leg that is connected to a turn. You can modify the slope of only
one leg at a time. You must select a turn feature, and then select the Modify Slope option
on the ribbon to activate this dialog box.

Current Slope Values - Displays the current slope for each leg connected to the turn. Legs with
an invalid slope display in italics.
New Slope Value - Select the leg for which you want to modify the slope, and then select a new
slope. The leg that you are editing highlights in the model. If you are trying to model a small
slope but cannot get the software to model it, you might be hitting the minimum slope setting in
the registry. Contact Intergraph Support for assistance in editing the setting.

Select Pipe Run Dialog Box


This dialog box displays all of the pipe runs that have been placed in the defined Workspace.
Select a pipe run from the hierarchy, and then click OK. The dialog box displays when you
select More... from the Run box in the Route Pipe ribbon.

See Also
Route Pipe (on page 133)
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 211)

162 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Route Pipe

Select System Dialog Box


This dialog box displays all of the defined pipeline systems so that you can select the pipeline
system that you want.
Look in - Specify where you want to look for the pipeline system. Select Workspace to look for
the pipeline system in your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the pipeline
system in the entire model database.

Insulation Specification Dialog Box


Displays the available insulation specifications for the active piping system. Select the insulation
specification that you want to use, and then click OK.

You can modify the list of available insulation specification by switching to the Systems
and Specifications task, selecting the piping system or pipeline system that you want to modify,
and then selecting the Allowed Specifications command on the ribbon bar.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 163


Route Pipe

164 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 14

Moving Pipe Features


After you complete routing a pipe run, you can move the features along the leg of that run. By
moving the features, you can alter the route of the pipe, connection points, or component
placement. Using this ability to move features of your pipe runs, you can precisely locate each
feature in the layout of your piping systems.
The various types of features that you can move in this method include the following:

Straight Features
The straight feature and other connected route features move subject to the following rules:
 Moving a straight feature moves the entire leg to which the feature is connected.
 The move direction is always perpendicular to the axis of the straight feature.
 A branch feature connected to the moved leg maintains its original angle.
 Movement stops when parts on the associated leg overlap, or when they overlap with
adjacent parts on connected legs.
 As long as the end of the leg connected to the equipment nozzle is in the same plane as the
turn or branch, the leg moves and shrinks—if, however, the logically connected end feature
is not overlapping another feature on the leg.
When moving straight features, you can select one of the orientation handles that appear at the
ends of the straight feature as your "move from" point. These orientation handles allow you to
move the pipe in relation to the edge of the pipe instead of the pipe centerline. For example, you
can use the orientation handles to align the bottom of pipe with the top of a beam. The display of
the orientation handles is controlled by the Key point option on the Tools > Options >
SmartSketch tab. Unless you need them, we recommend that you keep the orientation handles
turned off as they can cause selecting the pipe end feature challenging.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 165


Moving Pipe Features

Straight Features with Terminus Features


Selecting a straight feature will sometimes not result in a move because the software cannot
constrain the move vectors and maintain them during the move. However, if you select a straight
feature along with its terminus features, such as turns or branches, the software tries to maintain
the angles of the terminus features.

 You cannot move a single turn this way.


 If moving the straight feature and terminus features results in a degenerated case, the
software attempts to move all of the selected features back to their last committed locations.

Turn Features
The turn feature and other connected route features move subjected to the following rules:
 If you move a turn to a position where the two adjacent legs are collinear (that is, the turn
reaches 180 degrees), the software deletes the turn.
 The turn stops moving when it starts to overlap with an adjacent along leg feature.
 If neither angle 2 or 3 is locked, the move is along the bisector. If either angle 2 or 3 is
locked, the move is along the other leg.

166 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Moving Pipe Features

End Features
The end feature and other connected route features move subjected to the following rules:
 Moving the end feature edits the length of the straight feature.
 Moving the end feature edits the topology of the turn feature or the branch feature if
connected to another leg. The default motion plane is the connected Turn Feature or Along
Leg Feature.
 You cannot move an end feature connected to a nozzle.
 You cannot move the end feature past the point where the straight feature length becomes
zero, such as the point where an end feature touches a nozzle or free port of another
feature.
 For non-branching situations, if you move or paste an end feature within ¼ inch (6.35 mm)
of another end feature, the software automatically connects the two end features. This
automatic connection works for both flange and butt-weld connections. Please note that the
software will lengthen or shorten the pipe length to make the connection.

Branch Features
 If the branch and header are in the motion plane, the branch feature moves along the
branch leg.
 If the branch and header are not in the motion plane, the end of the branch leg and branch
feature move to keep the branch angle constant.
 You can move the branch feature along the associated straight feature. As you move the
feature, the angle between the branch feature and the branch leg appears in a dynamic
readout.

Along Leg Features


 You can move along leg features along the pipe on which you placed them. The software
prevents you from moving the along leg feature past the end of the pipe or to a position that
would cause parts to overlap.
 Along Leg Features that are not branches (valves and flanges are examples) maintain a
position at a constant distance from the fixed end of the leg.
You can move features only after you finish routing a pipe run and placing components. Edit
commands are not available until you complete routing or placement. You can complete a
feature move by right-clicking or by pressing Esc.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 167


Moving Pipe Features

Tagged Components
The software does not replace components with a TAG when re-computing a run after a move
operation. Components like elbows and tees' should not have a TAG because that will prevent
the software from replacing them when needed during the re-compute.

What do you want to do?


 Move a pipe run (on page 168)
 Move a branch (on page 168)
 Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet (on page 169)
 Move a pipe end (on page 169)
 Move a straight pipe (on page 169)
 Move a turn (on page 170)

Move a pipe run


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to move.
4. Select Move on the main ribbon.
5. Select a motion plane on the ribbon.
6. Select a location either on the pipe run or in the model to use as the move-from location.
Use the end of the pipe run as the move-from location if you are trying to connect the
pipe run to a nozzle or another pipe run. If you move the end within ¼ inch (6.35 mm) of
another pipe end, the software automatically connects the two ends. Please note that the
software will lengthen or shorten the pipe length as needed to make the connection.
7. Identify the move-to location in the model.

Move a branch
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the straight pipe of the branch to move.
By selecting the straight pipe of the branch, the software automatically moves the
branching feature (the tee for example) along the header. If you select the tee, only the tee
and that end of the straight pipe move along the header, which causes the tee to be
removed.
4. Click Move To .
5. Identify the move to point.
If you do not define a starting point by using Move From the software assumes that
the current location of the object is the starting point.

168 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Moving Pipe Features

Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Drag a fence around the branch-parent feature (on the header leg), the olet, and the
end-feature at the free end of the olet.

4. Select either Route Multi-Move or the Move command and move the selected olet
to the new location on the header.

Move a pipe end


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe end that you want to move.
Make sure you select the pipe end and not the pipe itself.
4. Click Move To on the ribbon.
5. Identify the new location for the pipe end.

 You can use the Length box to type a new length for the pipe. The software moves the pipe
end to the specified length.
 If you move a pipe end within ¼ inch (6.35 mm) of another pipe end, the software
automatically connects to two ends. Please note that the software will lengthen or shorten
the pipe length as needed to make the connection.

Move a straight pipe


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe feature that you want to move.
4. Set the Length Lock as needed.
5. Select Move To .

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 169


Moving Pipe Features

6. Identify the new location for the pipe.

 When you move a straight feature, such as a pipe, the default working plane is the plane of
one of the adjacent turns. The software selects the turn first by the plane that includes
branches, and then by the plane of larger nominal diameter.
 You can select one of the orientation handles that appear at the ends of the straight feature
as your move from point. These orientation handles allow you to move the pipe in relation to
the edge of the pipe instead of the pipe centerline. For example, you can use the orientation
handles to align the bottom of pipe with the top of a beam. The display of the orientation
handles is controlled by the Key point option on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.
Unless you need them, we recommend that you keep the orientation handles turned off as
they can make selecting the end feature of a pipe challenging.

Move a turn
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the turn that you want to move.
4. Click Move To .
5. Identify the new location of the turn.
You can use the Angle box to type a new angle for the turn. The software moves the turn
along the pipe to the specified angle.

170 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 15

Editing Properties
All objects that compose a pipeline have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the pipeline object that you want to edit.

An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon.
The Locate Filter box contains the available, pre-defined filters for the Select command. When
you choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered
objects in a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Pipe
Runs, you can select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Piping task includes these filters:
Pipelines - Allows you to select only pipelines in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Piping Runs - Allows you to select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Piping Features - Limits the selection of objects to only pipe features. Some examples of
features are straight features, such as pipe, and in-line component features, such as valves.
Piping Parts - Allows you to select in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, only the
individual pipe parts that are associated with a feature. For example, a valve feature might have
several parts: the valve body and the flanges.
Taps - Allows you to select only taps in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Welds - Allows you to select only welds in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Clamps - Allows you to select only clamps in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Connections - Allows you to select only connections in the graphic view. The software creates
a connection whenever a piping component is connected to another component, an equipment
nozzle, or a pipe.
Spools - Allows you to select only spools in a graphic view or on the Assembly tab in the
Workspace Explorer. You can break pipelines into spools using the Generate Spools
command.
Penetration Spools - Allows you to select only penetration spools. Before you can create
penetration spools, you must place a penetration plate in the Hangers and Supports task.
Equipment - Allows you to select only equipment in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Piping Nozzle - Allows you to select only pipe nozzles in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
All - Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
More - Displays the Select Filter dialog box. The Select Filter dialog box displays all of the
simple filters that are set up to accept object type or system objects as discrimination data. You
can then select additional filters to add them to this list. Only the selection of filters is available;
all other options are disabled.
Use the Inside fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 171


Editing Properties

Use the Inside/Overlapping fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence
and those objects outside but touching the fence at some point.

Associating Features with a New Run


When you select multiple features and associate them with a new run by selecting <New Pipe
Run> from the Run list, the Create New Run dialog box is populated with all of the properties
belonging to the run associated with the selected features. If the existing run's properties do not
match the defaults specified in the system, a dialog box displays asking you whether you want
to retrieve these properties from the System, the Run, or None.

 If the initial set of features belongs to more than one run, the software checks if all of the
selected features belong to the same system. If they do, a dialog box displays asking if you
want to retrieve the properties from the System or None.
 If the features belong to different systems, the software displays the following message:
Selected features do not have common default run properties. Please review the run
properties to ensure they meet requirements.
 If the selected features are not contiguous, the software displays the following message:
Features being assigned to target run are not contiguous. Do you want to proceed
with this operation?
 This functionality works the same if you select an individual feature.

What do you want to do?


 Edit pipeline properties (on page 172)
 Edit pipe run properties (on page 173)
 Edit branch properties (on page 173)
 Edit straight pipe properties (on page 173)
 Edit turn feature properties (on page 173)
 Edit part properties (on page 174)

Edit pipeline properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Pipeline in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the pipeline to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

172 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Editing Properties

Edit pipe run properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the pipe run to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

 You can edit the flow direction of the pipe run by clicking the flow direction indicator on the
pipe run and then selecting the new direction.
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Edit branch properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the branch, such as a tee, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the branch properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit branch properties.

Edit straight pipe properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the straight pipe to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Edit turn feature properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the turn to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 173


Editing Properties

Edit part properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the part, such as a flange, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

174 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 16

Deleting Features
Just as you place features to place parts in your pipe run, you delete features to remove
unwanted parts. You cannot delete parts directly. The software attempts to maintain the design
integrity of the model by adjusting all previously connected features. The behavior of various
objects during deletion is detailed below:

Pipelines
 Deleting a pipeline deletes all pipe runs, features, and parts associated with that pipeline.
 The Piping task cuts the pipeline legs at all boundaries and creates gaps. The software
neither extends nor inserts a straight feature.

Pipe Runs
 Deleting the run deletes all features (and thereby all parts) belonging to the run.
 The Piping task cuts the pipe run legs at all boundaries and creates gaps. The software
neither extends nor inserts a straight feature.

Straight Features
 Deleting a straight feature does not remove the connected turn features.
 Deleting a straight feature also does not delete any adjacent branch features if the straight
feature is connected to the branch port of the feature. For tee-type branches, the system
leaves the Tee in place. Branching valves, instruments and piping specialties will not be
deleted in either of these cases mentioned above.
 Deletion of a straight feature adjacent to a split feature removes the split feature if no other
part is connected to the split feature.
 Deletion of a straight feature adjacent to a run change feature removes the run change
feature.
 If the straight feature connects to a component, the software does not delete the component
when the straight feature is deleted. However, any mating parts generated to facilitate
connection to the component are deleted.

Turn Features
 Straight features connected to the deleted turn extend to the turn point.
 Deleting a turn feature removes all adjacent run change features and mating parts.
 When a branch feature is adjacent to the turn feature, the software inserts a straight feature
to avoid deleting a branch.

Inline Components or Split Features


 If an inline component or split feature is deleted, the software deletes all mating parts. The
two connected straight features merge, forming one straight feature, provided they share the
same parent pipe run and the same nominal piping diameter (NPD).

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 175


Deleting Features

What do you want to do?


 Delete a branch (on page 176)
 Delete a straight pipe (on page 176)
 Delete a component (on page 176)
 Delete a split (on page 176)
 Delete a turn (on page 177)
 Delete a pipe run (on page 177)
 Delete a pipeline (on page 177)

Delete a branch
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the branch to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a straight pipe


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe feature to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to delete.
4. Click Delete .
The software automatically deletes all mating components (flanges and gaskets, for
example) that were placed with the component that you deleted.

Delete a split
1. Click Select .
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the split or takedown joint to delete.
4. Click Delete .

176 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Deleting Features

Delete a turn
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the turn to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a pipe run


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a pipeline
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Pipelines in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipeline to delete.
4. Click Delete .

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 177


Deleting Features

178 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 17

Insert Component
Places components such as valves, steam traps, strainers, tees, turns, fire protection items,
and other piping specialty items. When inserting components, the software automatically splits
the pipe (straight or curved) and adds the necessary mating components when required. This
command also places surface mounted components (such as ultrasonic flow meters or
penetration sleeves) that do not split a pipe run.

You can add components either during the routing of a pipe run or after the pipe has been
routed.
The system uses the pipe specification, nominal diameter of the selected pipe run, and the
geometry of the insertion point to filter the available components. For example, if the insertion
point is not at the end of a pipe run or at an equipment nozzle, turn components are not included
in the list of available components. When you insert a component, the software generates any
mating and connection parts required to connect the inserted part to the adjacent objects.
When inserting components, you can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along
commands to position components precisely in a pipe run. You can select this command and
then select a component in a P&ID to correlate the component in the P&ID to the component in
your model.
If you specify that the component should be created as a new run by selecting <New
Pipe Run> from the Run list, the software populates the Create New Run dialog box with the
properties belonging to the existing run (that is, the run you selected in which to insert the
component). If the properties of the existing run do not match the defaults specified in the piping
system, the software displays a dialog box asking you if you want to use the properties of the
System, Run, or None.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 179


Insert Component

Insert Component Ribbon


Sets options for adding a valve or other components into a pipe run.
Properties - Activates the Pipe Component Feature Properties dialog box. You can use
this dialog box to specify how the specifications of the component are defined. You can specify
component specifications in one of three ways:
 Select the pipe run into which the component is being placed.
 Select a specification directly.
 Select the part specification in the catalog.
Select Straight or End Feature - Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle on which you want to
place a component.
Type - Displays a list of available component short codes based on the piping specification and
nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the insertion location. Select
the type of component that you want to insert. Select the <Specify Component Tag> option to
specify the component that you want to use by typing in the component tag. Also select
<Specify Component Tag> to place instrument specialty or piping specialty items, including
those available from retrieved Dimensional Data Sheet information.
Select <Default Branch> to place the default branch component as defined in the branch table.
Select <Default Turn> or <Default Reducer> to place the default turn or the default reducer as
defined in the piping specification. The <Default Turn> and <Default Reducer> options are
only available when you select a pipe end feature.
Option - Displays the option of the selected component. In addition, the Option drop down list
contains any options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type
list. Selecting a value from the Option list updates the objects. See Pipe Specifications in Piping
Reference Data Guide for more information on defining pipe specifications.
Enter Insertion Point - Positions the component that you are placing along the pipe that you
selected. You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to define the
precise location of the component on the pipe run.
Finish - Places the component in the pipe run.
Run - Specifies to which pipe run the component belongs to. If the component that you are
placing is a branching or run change component, the software displays a list of run from which
you can select. If you need a new run, select <New Pipe Run>. For more information on
creating a pipe run, see New Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 154).
If you specify that the component should be created as a new run by selecting <New
Pipe Run> from the Run list, the software populates the Create New Run dialog box with the
properties belonging to the existing run (that is, the run you selected in which to insert the
component). If the properties of the existing run do not match the defaults specified in the piping
system, the software displays a dialog box asking you if you want to use the properties of the
System, Run, or None.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 154).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks to see if the run already exists in the SmartPlant Layout
model. If the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New
Pipe Run dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the
defaults. When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.

180 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Component

Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.
Name - Displays the name of the component being inserted.
Flip - Select this option to change the component port that is connected to the selected port.
If you are inserting a lateral, tee, or other tee-type branch into a length of pipe or between two
other components, only the inline ports of the component are available. However, if you insert
the same component at the end of a pipe or at a nozzle, all component ports are available.
Reference position - Slides the component that you are inserting so that its origin or selected
port is positioned at the insertion point. If the selected reference position does not lie along the
axis of the leg, then the software projects the position so that it intersects the axis and the
component slides so that the projected point is located at the insertion point.
Select Specify Reference Position to select in the graphics window a mating part, or an
associated port, that you want to use as the reference position. The Reference position box
updates with the name of the object that you selected.
Rotate - Select to rotate the component about the pipe interactively.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the component rotated about the pipe.
Operator Angle - Type an angle at which you want the valve operator to be rotated about the
valve stem. This angle does not affect the valve body.
Branch Position - Select which side of the pipe to place the non-radial tangential or
non-tangential component.

Edit Component Ribbon


Provides options for editing the components placed in the model.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected component. See Pipe
Component Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 204) for more information.
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the component is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Specifies the name of the pipe run in which the component is placed.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected component. In addition, the Type
list contains the short codes associated with any other components with similar geometry
defined in the piping specification for the current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the
Type list replaces the selected component with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected component, if applicable. In addition, the Option list
contains any other options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the
Type list. For example, if two different rating values were available in the piping specification for
the short code selected in the Type list, both options would appear in this list. Selecting a value

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 181


Insert Component

from the Option list updates the object. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide
for more information on defining pipe specifications.
Name - Displays the name of the component that you are modifying. Type another name if
needed.
Flip - Select this option to change the component port that is connected to the selected port.
If you are inserting a lateral, tee, or other tee-type branch into a length of pipe or between two
other components, only the inline ports of the component are available. However, if you insert
the same component at the end of a pipe or at a nozzle, all component ports are available.
Rotate - Select to rotate the component about the pipe interactively.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the component rotated about the pipe.
Branch Position - Select the position of the branch centerline relative to the header centerline.
Select Radial to place the branch such that its centerline intersects the header centerline. Select
Non-Radial to place the branch such that its center line does not intersect the header
centerline. If you select Non-Radial, you can specify the distance the branch centerline is offset
from the header centerline up to being tangent to the outside diameter of the header.

Figure 4: Radial and Non-Radial Positions

Specify Component Tag Dialog Box


Allows you to specify the component that you want to use by the component tag. You activate
this dialog box by selecting the Insert Component command, and then selecting <Specify
Component Tag> from the Type option.
Source for Tags - Specifies the location of component tags in the Component Tag drop down
list.
 Catalog - Select this option to show components in the Catalog.
 Design Basis - Select this option to show components in the referenced Design Basis.
Honor Specification - Select this option to show components that are only valid for the piping
material class that the selected pipe is assigned.

182 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Component

Component tag - Type the tag of the component that you want to use. Select Browse
Instruments to place an instrument. Select Browse Piping Specialties to place a piping
specialty item. You can also specify the name of an instrument that was retrieved from
SmartPlant Electrical.

What do you want to do?


 Insert a component (on page 183)
 Insert a component while routing (on page 183)
 Insert an instrument (on page 184)
 Insert a piping specialty item (on page 184)
 Insert a surface mounted component (on page 184)
 Insert the default branch (on page 185)
 Insert the default turn (on page 185)
 Insert the default reducer (on page 185)
 Place a tee from a P&ID (on page 186)
 Place an elbolet (on page 186)
 Select component settings (on page 186)
 Edit component properties (on page 187)
 Move a component (on page 187)
 Rotate a component (on page 188)
 Rotate a component on a nozzle (on page 188)

Insert a component
1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the component. If
you select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. Select the component type and option in the Type and Option boxes.
4. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.
When placing components on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as
the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place a component at the mid-point of a pipe, for example. You can
set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert a component while routing


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the component type and option in the Type and Option boxes.
3. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 183


Insert Component

4. Click Finish.
5. Continue routing the pipe run.
When inserting components on the end feature of an arc pipe, you can use Arc Routing
or Straight Routing options on the Insert Component ribbon bar to control the orientation of the
pipe feature. If you select Arc Routing, then the inserted component is oriented such that you
can continue to route an arc pipe feature from the other end of it. If you select Straight Routing,
then the inserted component is oriented such that you can continue to route a straight pipe
feature from the other end of it.

Insert an instrument
1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle in which to insert the instrument specialty object. If you
select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type option, select Specify Component Tag.
4. In the Component Tag box, type the instrument tag or select Browse Instruments.
5. Select the instrument object to place.
6. Click Finish.
When placing instruments on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as the
placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place instruments at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You can set
the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert a piping specialty item


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle in which to insert the piping specialty item. If you select
a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type option, select Specify Component Tag.
4. In the Component Tag box, type the object tag or select Browse piping specialty.
5. Select the piping specialty item to place.
6. Click Finish.
When placing piping specialty items on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point
location as the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the
pipe. This functionality allows you to place an item at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You
can set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert a surface mounted component


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe on which to insert the surface mounted feature. The point at which you
identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. Select the surface mounted component short code and option in the Type and Option
boxes.
4. If needed, change the position of the component using the Reference Position, and Angle
options on the ribbon.

184 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Component

5. Click Finish.
You must bulkload the Sample Data for Surface Mounted Components using PCF.xls
workbook before you can place surface mounted components.

Insert the default branch


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the default branch. If
you select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Branch>.
4. In the Run box on the ribbon, define the pipe run for the branch by either selecting an
existing run or by using the New Pipe Run dialog box to create a new pipe run.
The software uses the branch table to place the correct default branch feature.
5. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
6. Click Finish.
When placing components on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as
the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place a component at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You can
set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert the default reducer


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the component.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Reducer>.
4. In the Run box on the ribbon, define the new pipe run for the other side of the reducer.
The software reads the piping specification to determine the correct default reducer to place.
5. If needed, change the position of the component using Reference Position and Angle
options on the ribbon.
6. Click Finish.

Insert the default turn


1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the default turn.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Turn>.
The software reads the piping specification to determine the default turn to use.
4. If needed, change the position of the turn using Turn Angle, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 185


Insert Component

Place a tee from a P&ID


1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the pipe runs for
that branch. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains pipe runs.
3. Review the P&ID to determine where you need to insert the tee or branch in the model.
Specifically, you need to identify the header and branch pipe runs.
4. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the header run in which to insert the tee or other branch component.
6. Select the component type and the option in the Type and Option boxes.
7. Position the component on the header pipe run.
8. Click Finish.
9. Using the Route Pipe command, route the branch pipe run into the branch component
that you just placed on the header pipe run.
As you model and branch into a header line, a tee is automatically generated by the
software.

Place an elbolet
1. Click Insert Tap .
2. Select the elbow on which to place the elbolet.
3. From the Option list, select a tap size that is the same size as the elbolet's first size.
4. Click Finish.
5. Click Insert Component .
6. Select the tap that you just placed on the elbow.
7. From the Type list, select Elbolet.
8. Click Finish.

Select component settings


1. Click Properties on the ribbon.
2. If needed, select the type and option for the component in the Type and Option boxes.
Other properties can be modified as needed.
3. Place the component.
The Configuration tab and Relationship tab of the properties dialog box are available
only when you edit an existing object.

186 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Component

Edit component properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the component properties.

 Use the Rotate option on the ribbon bar to dynamically rotate the component. Use the
Angle option to type the rotation angle.
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit component properties.

Edit tap properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Taps in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the tap to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

Move a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to move.
4. Click Move To .
5. Specify the new component location.

 If you do not select a move from location, the current location of the object is used as the
from location.
 You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to locate the
component precisely.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 187


Insert Component

Rotate a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to rotate.
4. Click Rotate and move the mouse to rotate the component.
5. Click to release the component at the new rotation angle.
You also can enter a rotation angle in the Angle box.

Rotate a component on a nozzle


1. In the Locate Filter, select Piping Features.
2. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
3. Select the end feature (that is not connected to the nozzle) on the component to rotate.
4. Lock the plane control to a plane that is perpendicular to the axis of rotation.
5. Lock the length control.
6. Click Move To .
7. Move the cursor to rotate the component.

188 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


SECTION 18

Insert Split
Divides the pipe into sections. You can use any split feature defined in the reference data,
such as a flange or a butt weld, to connect the two resulting pipes.

You can select this command while routing pipe, or select it after routing pipe to insert a split in
an existing pipe. If you select the Insert Split command and then select an existing pipe, you
have two options:
 You can have the software cut the pipe feature into two features that represent two pipe
parts joined by a weld joint or a takedown joint.
 You can have the software cut the pipe feature into two features that represent a single pipe
part using a feature break. When splitting using a feature break, no weld or connection is
placed so the two-features combined represent a single pipe part. By using a feature break,
you can stop heat-tracing, insulation, or a surface coating at an arbitrary location along the
pipe instead of at a weld or other break in the line.
You also have the option to place flange and butt weld splits in single-placement or
multi-placement mode. In multi-placement mode, you can select either pipe runs or straight
features and specify the distance between the splits. The default distance is the purchased pipe
length defined in the piping specification.
When you insert a takedown joint, the software automatically selects and positions the
necessary parts based on the split feature information in the pipe specification defined for the
pipe run. If you select a sleeved weld joint, the software automatically selects and positions the
sleeve. The software uses the reference data that defines specific parts for standard splits. The
allowed parts are generally a very restricted subset of the parts (flanges and sleeves) that are
allowed for general placement by the specification.
You can select an existing split and edit any part of the split feature definition by clicking the
appropriate ribbon control.
Special takedown joints not covered by the pipe specification split rules can be manually
created by inserting flange components using the Insert Component command. When you
place a flange manually as a component, the software automatically cuts the pipe and inserts
the appropriate mating part for the flange.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 189


Insert Split

Insert Split Ribbon


Sets options for inserting splits into a pipe run.
Pipe Split Feature Properties - Opens the Pipe Split Feature Properties dialog box in
which you can define additional properties that are not available on the ribbon bar. For more
information, see Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 215).
Select Feature - Selects the pipe in which you want to insert a split.
Enter Insertion Point - Defines the location to insert the split.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run to which the split belongs along with the names of all
other runs associated with the same pipeline parent. You can select another pipe run if needed.
You can select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent.
Weld Joint - Select this option when a welded joint is necessary.
Takedown Joint - Select this option when a takedown joint is necessary.
Feature Break - Select this option to place a feature break. Feature breaks are used to stop
heat-tracing, insulation, and coatings at arbitrary locations along a pipe without having to break
the pipe into two pipe parts.
Type - Select the type of split component to place. The software generates this list based on the
components allowed by the pipe specification for the selected pipe. You can also specify the
component that you want to use by selecting Specify Component Tag and then entering the
component tag. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on
defining pipe specifications.
Option - Displays the option of the selected split component. In addition, the Option list
contains any options defined in the pipe specification for the short code selected in the Type list.
Select another value from the Option list to update the object.
Finish - Places the splits using the parameters that you have specified.
Split Mode - Specifies whether to place a single split or multiple splits. Select Single Split to
place a single split or feature break at a specified location. Select Multi Split to place splits on
straight features at a specified distance apart. You can select a single straight feature or an
entire run in this mode. If you select an entire run, the splits are placed at the specified distance
apart on each individual straight feature in the run, but not across the entire run itself. The Multi
Split option will not place splits on bent pipe. Splits placed using the Multi Split option have no
relation to each other after placement. Feature breaks cannot be placed in the Multi Split mode.
Pipe Length - Enter the distance between the splits. The default distance is the purchased pipe
length defined in the piping specification. This option is only available when Split Mode is set to
Multi Split.
Reference - Select Start to measure the distance from the start end (the first end that was
placed) of the pipe. Select End to measure from the end of the pipe. This option is only available
when Split Mode is set to Multi Split.

190 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Split

Edit Split Feature Ribbon


Displays options for modifying a split in a pipe.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box. For more information, see Pipe Split
Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 215).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the split is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run or runs that are adjacent to the selected split feature. If
two different runs are listed, you can specify either run as the owner of the split.
Weld Joint - Select this option to change the split to a welded joint.
Takedown Joint - Select this option to change the split to a takedown joint.
Type - Select the type of split. The software generates this list based on those components
allowed by the pipe specification for the selected pipe.
Option - Displays the option of the selected Type. Additionally, the Option list contains any
options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For
example, if two different rating are available in the piping specification for a flange short code
selected in the Type list, both options appear in this list. Selecting another value from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.

What do you want to do?


 Insert a welded split (on page 191)
 Insert a takedown joint (on page 191)
 Insert multiple splits a specified distance apart
 Insert a feature break (on page 192)
 Edit split properties (on page 192)
 Edit weld properties (on page 192)
 Move a split (on page 193)
 Move a feature break (on page 193)

Insert a welded split


1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Select the pipe to split.
4. Click Weld Joint on the ribbon.
5. Select the type and option for the split in the Type and Option boxes.
6. Click to define the position of the welded split.
You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the split.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 191


Insert Split

Insert a takedown joint


1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Select the pipe to split.
4. Click Takedown on the ribbon.
5. Select the type and option for the split in the Type and Option boxes.
6. Click to define the position of the split.
You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the split.

Insert a feature break


1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Click Feature Break on the ribbon.
4. Select the pipe feature to break.
5. Click to define the position of the feature break.

 You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the feature break.
 When splitting using a feature break, no weld or connection is placed so the two- features
combined represent a single pipe part. By using a feature break, you can stop heat-tracing,
insulation, or a surface coating at an arbitrary location along the pipe instead of at a weld or
other break in the line.

Edit split properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the split to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Edit weld properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Welds in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the weld to edit from the Workspace Explorer or in the model.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

192 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Insert Split

Move a split
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the split or takedown joint to move.
4. Click Move From to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the split is the starting point.
5. Click Move To .
6. Move the split to a new location.
You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to help locate
the split more precisely.

Move a feature break


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the feature break to move.
4. Click Move on the main toolbar.
5. Click Move From to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the feature break is the starting point.
6. Click Move To .
7. Move the feature break to a new location.
You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to help locate
the feature break more precisely.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 193


Insert Split

194 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


APPENDIX A

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes


This appendix contains reference information for all the property dialog boxes in the Piping task.

In This Appendix
Common Property Tabs ................................................................. 195
Connection Properties Dialog Box ................................................. 201
Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box ...................................... 202
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box ......................................... 202
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box .............................................. 204
Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box........................... 204
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box ....................................... 207
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box ............................................... 210
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box .................................................... 210
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box .................................................... 211
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................................... 215
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box ................................. 219
Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box ....................................... 222
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................................... 222
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box .................................................. 225
Spool Properties Dialog Box .......................................................... 226

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 195


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Common Property Tabs


The software displays some common property tabs on the properties dialog boxes for all piping
objects. Instead of repeatedly listing the common tabs with each piping object property dialog
box, they are documented here for easy reference.
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Connections Tab (on page 197)
Definition Tab (on page 197)
Notes Tab (on page 197)
Occurrence Tab (on page 198)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant - Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group - Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can
select another permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project
Management task.
Transfer - Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission
group to another satellite or host permission group. This button is only available if the active
model or project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The button is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are nontransferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the Surface Style Rules.
Approval State - Displays the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your
access level, you may not be able to change the status of the object.
You cannot move or rotate an object with a status other than Working. If you have
permission, you must change the status to Working to complete a move or rotate operation.
Status - Specifies where the object stands in the workflow process. Changing this property sets
the Approval State. The items in this list are controlled by the ApprovalReason.xls file. This file
must be bulkloaded. For more information, see the ApprovalReason topic in the SmartPlant
Layout Reference Data Guide.
Date Created - Displays the date and time that the object was created.
Created by - Displays the user name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified - Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Last Modified by - Displays the user name of the person who modified the object.
Model Name - Displays the Reference 3D model name to which the object belongs. This option
is available only for a Reference 3D object.
File Name - Displays the source file name of the Reference 3D model. This option is available
only for a Reference 3D object.

196 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box


Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location - Displays the name of the location that the current permission group is
associated with. All of the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group - Displays the name of the permission group that the selected
objects are currently associated with. If all of the objects in the select set do belong to the same
permission group, this box appears blank.
New location - Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a
global workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to
one or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group - Specifies the new permission group to which you want to assign the
selected objects. If you specify a value in the New location box, this list displays all permission
groups that you have write access to in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the
New location box, this list includes all permission groups that you have write access to in all
locations except the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any
permission groups at any locations other than the current one.
It is strongly recommended that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Connections Tab
Displays the connection information for the object, the properties and their values, as defined in
the reference data. For more information about the information defined in the reference data,
see the Piping Reference Data Guide.
Connector - Select the connector for which you want to view properties.
Property - Displays the name of the property as defined in the reference data.
Value - Displays the value of the corresponding property.

Definition Tab
The Definition tab displays the object properties as they are defined in the reference data. The
property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears
on the right side of the grid. If you select more than one object and then view the properties, only
the common properties between the selected objects appear.
The properties that appear depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 197


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point - Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name - Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date - Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time - Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note - Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author - Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text - Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension - Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be included
for the component in Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension option. The note
must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It is recommended
that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a requirement. The note Name
and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note - Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note - Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not
available in this version.
Highlight Note - Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and
the object to which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note - Deletes the currently displayed note.

198 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Occurrence Tab
Displays instance-specific information about the object.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the object. Object properties are
divided into several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, Fabrication and
Construction, and Bend Data.

Standard
Displays all the occurrence properties for the part as defined in the reference data. If the table is
blank, the object for which you are viewing properties does not have any occurrence properties
defined for it in the reference data. Not all standard category properties defined here are
available on every part type. For example, the cold spring length property is only available on
pipe parts. For more information about occurrences defined in the reference data, see the Piping
Reference Data Guide.
Name - Specifies the name of the object.
Name Rule - Displays how the object was named. If set to Default Name Rule, the software
named the object using the default naming rule. If set to User Defined, you, or someone else,
named the object manually.
Pipe Run - Displays the name of the parent pipe run to which the object belongs. This field is
read-only.
Type - Displays the object's short code. The list of available short codes is based on the piping
specification and nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the
insertion location.
Option - Displays a list of options that you can use instead of the selected object. If no options
exist, this field just displays Default. The Option list contains any options defined in the piping
specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For example, if you are looking at a
valve part, the Option list contains other valve parts, such as one with a higher pressure rating,
that you can use here. Selecting a value from the Option list updates the object.
Tag - Displays the engineering tag if one is assigned.
Base/Mating Part - Displays whether the selected object is a base part or a mating part. If the
object is a mating part, you can use this option to change the object to a base part. Use caution
however, because after a mating part has been changed to a base part, it cannot be changed
back to a mating part again.
Modeled Length - Displays the length of the pipe as it is modeled.
Cut Length - Displays the cut length of the pipe. The software calculates the cut length using
this formula:
Cut Length = Modeled Length + Field Fit Length End 1 + Field Fit Length End
2 + Flared Lap Length End 1 + Flared Lap Length End 2 - Pipe Bend Elongation
- Cold Spring Length + Bend Grip Length + Bend Pull Length
It is possible that the field fit lengths; the flared lap lengths; and the bending elongation, grip,
and pull lengths are not applicable to the cut length calculation for a given pipe and are therefore
ignored for that pipe.
Field Liner Thickness - Displays the field liner thickness if a liner in defined.
Cold Spring Length - Enter the cold spring length that you want to subtract from the cut length.
A positive value here makes the Cut Length value smaller. The cold spring length refers to
intentionally cutting a pipe short and then pulling the assembled pipeline to the connection point.
Hence, there is spring in the pipe until the pipe reaches operating temperature, at which point
there is theoretically no stress on the pipe or the connection.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 199


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Reporting Requirement - Select the reporting requirements for the object. You can specify that
the object is reported or not reported. An example of an object that you may not want reported is
a spacer for a valve. You have to order the valve, but the spacer comes with the valve and does
not need to be ordered.
Reporting Type - Select the reporting type. The options that are available here depend on what
you select for the Reporting Requirement.
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle of the object.
Stress System Number - Type a stress system number for the part.
Isometric Sheet Number - Type an isometric sheet number for the part. This property is used
in conjunction with the Group Pipe Parts.
Sequence ID - Specifies the sequence number for the object.
Branch Reporting Ownership Type Basis - Specifies whether the branch reporting ownership
was set by you or the system. This option is used by the software when an administrator
synchronizes the model with the catalog.
Angle - Displays the angle of the part.

Weight and CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected object. The software includes the
insulation weight in the calculated weight. If you key-in the weight yourself, you must include the
insulation weight in the weight value that you enter. The center-of-gravity locations are displayed
in global system coordinates along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
Dry Weight - Displays the dry weight of the object.
Wet Weight - Displays the wet weight of the object.
Dry CG X - Displays the X-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CG Y - Displays the Y-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CG Z - Displays the Z-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Wet CG X - Displays the X-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CG Y - Displays the Y-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CG Z - Displays the Z-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.

Fabrication and Construction


Fabrication Requirement - Select the fabrication requirement for the selected object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Type - Select the fabrication type for the selected object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Construction Requirement - Select the construction requirement for the selected object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type
select list in the Catalog task.
Construction Type - Select the construction type for the selected object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in
the Catalog task.

200 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Bend Data
The Bend Data category is only available if the administrator has bulk loaded the Pipe
Bending Manufacturability Rules.xls workbook, and you are viewing properties of a pipe part
with bends defined.
Minimum Length Check - Set this option to True if you want the software to validate pipe
bending manufacturability rules for the selected pipe part.
Bend Type - Defines the pipe bend type.
Preferred Bending Machine - Displays the name of the preferred bending machine as defined
in the reference data.
Minimum Tangent Data Set - Select the set of minimum tangent lengths to use with this pipe
bend configuration.
End Trimming - Specify whether or not ends are trimmed.
Grip Length - Defines the grip length.
Pull Length - Defines the pull length.
Number of Bends in Piece - Displays the number of bends in the pipe part.
Number of Tangents in Piece - Displays the number of tangents in the pipe part.
See Also
Common Property Tabs (on page 195)

Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the object for which you are viewing properties. For example, if
you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts, associated
control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS assignments,
including project relationships, appear on this tab.
Name - Displays the name of the related object.
Type - Displays the type of related object.
Go To - Displays the properties of the selected object.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 201


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Connection Properties Dialog Box


Displays connection properties for review and editing. Use the Relationships tab to view the
properties of the bolts, gaskets, washers, nuts, welds, and other information about the
connections.
The ownership assignment of connection items (such as welds, gaskets, bolts, and so forth) is
done through a hard-coded rule. Components have higher priority for ownership than
stock-parts (such as pipes). Between components, base-parts have higher priority (for example,
bolts and gaskets get assigned to a valve instead of the mating flanges). If both the parts are
equal in priority, the connection is between two pipes or the flange has been inserted explicitly
therefore both flange and valve are base-parts, the owner is determined by the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the two connected parts. The part that has the lower XYZ coordinates will be the
owner.
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 202)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected connection.
Category - Select the properties that you want to see. You can view system properties or
user-defined properties.
Pipeline - Displays the pipeline to which the connection belongs. You cannot change this value.
Connected Type - Displays the type of connection. You cannot change this value.
See Also
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 201)

Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box


Displays information about a penetration spool. You create penetration spools using the Create
Penetration Spools command.
Occurrence Tab (on page 198)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)

202 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box


Displays pipeline system properties for review and editing.
General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 203)
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 203)
Default Property Values Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box)
See Also
Edit Pipeline Properties (on page 172)

General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected pipeline.
Name - Specifies the name of the pipeline. This name is usually generated by the active name
rule. You can type a different name for the pipeline if you want. The name must be unique
throughout the life cycle of the plant.
Name rule - Specifies the name rule used to generate the name. Set this option to User
Defined if you want to specify the name yourself.
Type - Displays the type of object. On the Pipeline Properties dialog box, the type is Pipeline
System.
Parent System - Displays the system to which the pipeline belongs. You can change the parent
system of the pipeline if needed.
Description - Type a general description of the pipeline.
Sequence Number - Type an identification number for the pipeline. Generally, this is defined in
the P&ID data.
Fluid Requirement - Select the fluid requirement for the pipeline. You must select a fluid
requirement.
Fluid Type - Select the fluid type for the pipeline. You must select a fluid type.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipeline has been correlated to a pipeline in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipeline should be correlated to a P&ID pipeline. Select
Correlate object if the pipeline has a correlating pipeline in a P&ID. Select No correlation is
required if the pipeline does not have a correlating pipeline in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipeline is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if pipeline topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipeline data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.
See Also
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box (on page 202)

Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box)


Displays all the allowed specifications for the selected pipeline. You can define piping
specifications in the reference data; refer to the Piping Reference Data Guide for more
information. You can change which specifications are available for the pipeline by using the
Allowed Specifications command in the System and Specifications task.
See Also
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box (on page 202)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 203


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box


Displays bolt set properties for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 198)
Definition Tab (on page 197)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays properties for component features, such as valves, for review and editing.
Edit Split Properties (on page 192)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 204)

General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog


Box)
Displays and defines the general properties of the component feature.
Component features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the
pipe run property, the corresponding component properties also changes automatically.
Category - Component properties are divided into different categories: All, Standard,
Insulation and Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. You can select the category to
define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the component feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the component feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the component feature belongs. Other pipe runs in
the same system as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specifies the active pipe specification for the component feature. All pipe
specifications that are allowed for the system parent of the pipe run appear for selection. If
appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the component
feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specifies the nominal diameter (NPD) of the component feature. If
appears in the box, the NPD for the component feature is inherited from the pipe run to which
the component feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe
specification from the pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the
NPD of the selected part appears as a read-only value.
Type - Displays the types of component features allowed by the selected Specification and
Nominal Diameter. Component features are listed by short codes. You can change the
component feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part
selected manually and cannot be changed.

204 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Option - Displays a list of available component features. The software generates this list based
on the pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you
have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be
changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the component feature. The software selects the
part name using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the component has been correlated to a component in a
P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the component is correlated to a P&ID component. Select
Correlate object if the component has a correlating component in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the component does not have a correlating component in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the topology mismatch of components can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the data and topology mismatches of components can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 205


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.

206 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays end feature properties for review and editing.
General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 207)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected end feature.
Pipe end feature properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and
Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. Select the category to define values in the
Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the pipeline system to which the end feature belongs. You cannot change
the pipeline of the end feature.
Pipe Run - Displays the pipe run to which the end feature belongs. You cannot change the pipe
run of the end feature.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the end feature. All pipe specifications
that are allowed for the pipeline display for selection. If appears in the box, the pipe
specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the end feature belongs. If the icon does not
appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run
Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the end feature. If appears in
the box, the NPD for the end feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the end feature
belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe
run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part
appears and cannot be changed.
Type - Displays the types of end features allowed by the selected Specification and Nominal
Diameter. End features are listed by short codes. You can change the end feature type if
needed. If you have manually selected the part from the catalog, this box displays Part selected
manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available end features. The software generates this list based on the
pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code you selected in the Type box. If you have
manually selected the part from the catalog, this box displays Part selected manually and
cannot be changed.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 207


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the end feature. The part name is selected by the
software using the pipe specification guidelines. Select Select Manually to override the pipe
specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually, the
Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
The Select Manually option may not be available. It is enabled and disabled in the
reference data.
Correlation Status - Displays whether or not the pipe end feature has been correlated to a pipe
end feature in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipe end feature is correlated to a P&ID pipe end feature.
Select Correlate object if the pipe end feature has a correlating pipe end feature in a P&ID.
Select No correlation is required if the pipe end feature does not have a correlating pipe run in
a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipe end feature is approved with discrepancies
in the three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the pipe end feature topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipe end feature data and topology mismatches can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
You define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. You define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.

208 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 209


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 207)

Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box


Displays gasket properties for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 198)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Definition Tab (on page 197)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box


Displays properties for pipe parts for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 198)
Definition Tab (on page 197)
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Notes Tab (on page 197)

210 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box


Displays pipe run properties for review and editing.
Edit Pipe Run Properties (on page 173)
General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) (on page 211)
Layout Tab (PipeRun_PropertiesDB_LayoutTab_1r.htm)
Layout Connection Tab (PipeRun_PropertiesDB_LayoutConnectionTab_1r.htm)
Via Volumes Tab (PipeRun_PropertiesDB_ViaVolumesTab_1r.htm)

General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected pipe run.
Because pipe run properties are customizable in the piping reference data, only the
properties that are required by the software are documented.
Pipe run properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Testing,
Temperature and Pressure, Surface Treatment and Coating, Insulation and Tracing, and
Responsibility. Select the category that you want to define values for by using the Category
option.

Standard
Pipeline - Select the pipeline system to which you want the pipe run to belong. The last pipeline
system that you selected is the default. Select More to display all defined pipeline systems. You
can create a new pipeline in the Systems and Specifications task.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run. The pipe run name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you specify a name in this box, the software automatically sets the Name Rule box
to User Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to name the pipe run. You can select one of the listed
rules or specify the pipe run name yourself in the Name box.
Specification - Select the pipe specification for the pipe run. Only those pipe specifications that
are allowed in the pipeline that you selected appear in the list. You can assign pipe
specifications to pipeline systems in the System and Specifications task. You can define pipe
specifications in the reference data. See the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Nominal Diameter - Select the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) to use for this pipe run. The pipe
specification controls the available NPDs in this list. If you select an equipment nozzle as the
starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the NPD of the nozzle as the
NPD of the pipe run. You can select the NPD units to display on a session file basis using the
Tools > Options command on the Units of Measure tab.
Flow Direction - Select the flow direction for the pipe run. If you select an equipment nozzle as
the starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the flow direction of the
nozzle as the flow direction of the pipe run.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 211


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Minimum Slope - Specifies the slope for the pipe run. You can specify the slope as a ratio, a
percentage, or in degrees.
 As a ratio, if a run drops 1/4" for every foot of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
1/4"/1'-0".
 As a percentage, if a run drops 1" for every 10" of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
10%.
 In degrees, a five-degree slope can be specified as 5deg.
Slope Direction - Displays the direction type of the pipe run slope. If it is set to Single, the pipe
run slopes either up or down. You can change this to Multiple if needed. If it is set to Multiple,
the pipe run can slope both up and down. You cannot change this setting back to Single once
Multiple is selected.
Schedule Override - Specifies the thickness override for parts in the pipe run. If the piping
specification rules do not allow you to override components, then the software disables this
option.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipe run has been correlated to a pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipe run is required to be correlated to a P&ID pipe run.
Select Correlate object if the pipe run has a correlating pipe run in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the pipe run does not have a correlating pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipe run is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the pipe run topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipe run data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.

Temperature and Pressure


If service limits have been defined, then you must define one set of pressure/temperature
values (Design Maximum Temperature and Design Maximum Pressure, for example) before
you can place the object. The software does not prevent you from defining testing temperatures
and pressures that exceed the defined service limits.
Design Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.

212 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Operating Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum operating pressure. Include the
pressure unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this
value.
Testing Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Design Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum operating pressure. Include the pressure
unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 213


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Select the insulation specification to use. Select More to choose an
insulation specification allowed for the system. You assign which insulation specifications are
available in which systems in the System and Specifications task.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the purpose of the insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference
data.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Material box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the insulation material to use.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated
or a specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the
insulation thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the pipe run is heat-traced. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

214 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing the weld on the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 211)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 215


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays split feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Split Properties (on page 192)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 216)

General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the split feature.
Split features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe run
property, the corresponding split properties also automatically change.
Category - Pipe split properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and
Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. You can select the category to define values by
using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the split feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the split feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the split feature belongs. Other pipe runs in the same
system as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specifies the active pipe specification for the split feature. All the pipe
specifications that are allowed to be selected as the system parent of the pipe run appear for
selection. If appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which
the split feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification
from the pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specifies the nominal diameter (NPD) of the split feature. If appears in
the box, the NPD for the split feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the split feature
belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe
run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part
appears and cannot be changed.
Weld/Takedown Category - Select the category for the split.
Type - Displays the types of split features allowed by the selected Specification, Nominal
Diameter, and Weld/Takedown Category options. Split features are listed by short codes. You
can change the split feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box
displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available split features. The software generates this list based on the
pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you have
manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the split feature. The software selects the part
name using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override the
pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually, the
Nominal Diameter, Type, and Option properties are disabled.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the split has been correlated to a split in a P&ID.

216 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Correlation Basis - Specifies if the split is correlated to a P&ID split. Select Correlate object if
the split has a correlating split in a P&ID. Select No correlation is required if the split does not
have a correlating split in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the split is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the split topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the split data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None
if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define the insulation specifications that are available for the systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define the insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 217


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 215)

218 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays straight feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Straight Pipe Properties (on page 173)
General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 219)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the straight feature.
Straight features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe
run property, the corresponding straight properties also change automatically.
Pipe run properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and Tracing, and
Surface Treatment and Coating. You select which category that you want to define values for
by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the straight feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the straight feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the straight feature belongs. Other pipe runs in the
same pipeline as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the straight feature. All pipe
specifications that are allowed for the System parent of the pipe run appear for selection. If
appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the straight
feature belongs. If the icon does not appear and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the straight feature. If appears
in the box, the NPD for the straight feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the straight
feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected
part appears and cannot be changed.
Type - Displays the types of straight features allowed by the selected Specification and
Nominal Diameter. Straight features are listed by short codes. You can change the straight
feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected
manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available straight features. The software generates this list based on
the pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you
have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be
changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the straight feature. The software selects the part
number using the pipe specification guidelines. Choose the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Length - Displays the length of the straight feature. You cannot change the length of the straight
feature.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 219


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
You define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. You define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

220 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 219)

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 221


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays tap feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Tap Properties (on page 187)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)

Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box


Displays elbows, pipe bends, and other turn properties for review and editing.
Delete a Turn (on page 177)
Edit Turn Feature Properties (on page 173)
Move a Turn (on page 170)
General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 222)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected elbow or pipe bend.
Turn features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe run
property, the corresponding turn properties also automatically change.
Pipe turn feature properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Insulation
and Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. Select the category that you want to define
values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the name of the parent pipeline. This property is read-only.
Pipe Run - Specify the pipe run to which the turn belongs. Other pipe runs in the same pipeline
as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the turn. All the pipe specifications that
are allowed for the System parent of the pipe run display for selection. If appears in the box,
the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the turn belongs. If the icon does
not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run
Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the turn. If appears in the box,
the NPD for the turn is inherited from the pipe run to which the turn belongs. If the icon does not
appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If
you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part appears and cannot be
changed.
Type - Displays the types of turns allowed by the selected Specification and Nominal
Diameter. Turns are listed by short codes. You can change the turn type if needed. If you have
manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available turns. The software generates this list based on the pipe
specification, the NPD, and the short code you selected in the Type box. For example, if you
selected a 90E Default in the Type box and more than one elbow works in this pipe run, the
elbows appear here for selection. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part
selected manually and cannot be changed.

222 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the turn. The part number is selected by the
software using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Angle - Displays the angle of the turn feature. The angle is measured from the imaginary
extension of the run.
Bend Radius Multiplier - Specify the bend radius multiplier for the selected bend. This
overrides the default bend radius multiplier defined in the piping specification. This field is not
available unless the Pipe Bend Radius By User Option is set to Pipe Bend Radius By User Is
Enabled in the Catalog task. You can find the option in Catalog under the Piping > Piping
Specifications > Plant Options node in the tree view.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the object has been correlated to an object in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the object is correlated to a P&ID object. Select Correlate
object if the object has a correlating object in a P&ID. Select No correlation is required if the
object does not have a correlating object in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the object is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the object topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the object data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing


Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define the insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 223


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.

224 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 222)

Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box


Displays weld properties for review and editing.
Edit Weld Properties (on page 192)
General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box) (on page 225)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)

General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box)


Displays and defines the general properties of the selected weld. Properties are defined in the
reference data.
Weld properties are divided into different categories: Standard and Testing. You select which
category that you want to define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Name - Displays the name of the weld. The weld name is based on the Name Rule selection. If
you want to type a new name for the weld, then type a name for the weld in the Name box. If
you do specify the name of the weld yourself, do not include spaces in the weld name.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this weld.
Class - Displays the weld class. Valid classes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on
the Weld Type sheet.
Type - Specifies the weld type. Valid types are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Weld Type sheet. If appears in the box, the weld type is inherited from the pipe run to which
the weld belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the weld type from the pipe
run, select By Rule.
Welding Procedure Specification - Specifies the welding procedure specification.
Materials Category - Displays the materials category for the weld.
Materials Grade - Displays the materials grade for the weld.
Gap - Displays the gap between the welded ends of the welded joint.
Pass Length - Displays the weld length.
Thickness - Displays the weld thickness.
Height - Displays the weld height.
Owning Part - Select the component that owns the weld. The weld displays on the parent
component's isometric sheet.

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 225


Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Sequence Id - Displays the sequence ID for the weld. The sequence ID is generated when you
run the Sequence Objects command.

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.
See Also
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box (on page 225)

Spool Properties Dialog Box


Displays information about a piping spool. You can create spools using the Generate Spools
command.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog Box) (on page 226)
Relationship Tab (on page 201)
Configuration Tab (on page 196)

Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog Box)


Displays instance-specific information about the spool.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the object. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for spools.

Standard
Displays all the occurrence properties for the spool as defined in the reference data.
Name - Specifies the name of the spool.
Name Rule - Displays how the object was named. If set to Default Name Rule, the software
named the object using the default naming rule of <parent pipeline system>_Spool<sequence
number>. For example, 1001-P_Spool1 is the first spool of pipeline system 1001-P. If set to
User Defined, you, or someone else, named the object manually.
Sequence ID - Displays the spool sequence ID.
Spool Oversize Flag - Displays True if the spool is oversized. Displays False if the spool is not
oversized. The spool size is set on the Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box).

226 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Index

A D
Add all Pipe Runs in a P&ID for Routing • Define a New Run and Its Connections • 35
27 Define cross-sectional properties for a
Add Manually Selected Pipe Runs for prismatic shape • 80
Routing • 26 Define Run Connections Command • 34
Add segments to a path • 83 Define Run Connections for an Existing
Add Volume to Path Limit • 38 Run • 36
Appendix Define Run Connections Ribbon • 34
Property Dialog Boxes • 195 Define the path for a prismatic shape • 78
Associate Volume to Object • 115 Definition Tab • 197
Associating Volumes with Objects • 115 Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog
Automatically Route Command • 22 Box) • 49, 60
Automatically Route Pipe Runs • 27 Delete a branch • 176
Auto-Route • 21 Delete a component • 176
Auto-Router Dialog Box • 22 Delete a pipe run • 177
Delete a pipeline • 177
C Delete a relationship between a volume and
an object • 116
Change the flow direction of a pipe run • Delete a space object • 119
154 Delete a split • 176
Check Runs for Problems • 27 Delete a straight pipe • 176
Choose a working plane • 153 Delete a turn • 177
Common Property Tabs • 196 Deleting Features • 175
Configuration Tab • 196 Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box
Connection Properties Dialog Box • 202 • 56
Connections Tab • 197 Documentation Comments • 11
Convert a standard cross-section to a
sketch • 118
Copy a pipe run • 151 E
Create a new pipe run • 144 Edit branch properties • 173
Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run • Edit component properties • 187
145 Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic
Create a Pipeline System • 131 shape • 82
Create a Piping System • 132 Edit designed equipment properties • 55
Create a relationship between a volume Edit designed equipment reference
and an object • 116 coordinate system • 55
Create a space folder • 104 Edit equipment properties • 44
Create an arc pipe run • 145 Edit equipment relationships • 44
Create Path Ribbon • 73 Edit part properties • 174
Create Space Folder • 103 Edit Path Arc Ribbon • 75
Create Space Folder Ribbon • 104 Edit Path Straight Segment Ribbon • 74
Create Space Objects • 105 Edit Path Turn Ribbon • 76
Creating Customized Shapes • 71 Edit pipe run properties • 173
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Edit pipeline properties • 172
Properties Dialog Box) • 68 Edit prismatic shape properties • 66
Cross-Section Tab (Volume Properties Edit shape properties • 65
Dialog Box) • 126 Edit split properties • 192
Edit straight pipe properties • 173

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 227


Index

Edit tap properties • 187 Insert Component • 179


Edit turn feature properties • 173 Insert Split • 189
Edit volume properties • 127 Insert the default branch • 185
Edit Volume Ribbon • 116 Insert the default reducer • 185
Edit weld properties • 192 Insert the default turn • 185
Editing Properties • 171 Insulation Specification Dialog Box • 163
Equipment Properties Dialog Box • 45 Insulation Tab • 50, 61
Extend an existing arc pipe • 151
Extend an existing pipe run • 151 L
Layouts Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) • 32
F Limit Path Command • 37
Foundation Port Properties Dialog Box • 96 Limit Path Dialog Box • 37
Limit Path Ribbon • 37
G Load a Layout • 32
Load Pipe Run Definitions • 28
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Location Tab (Foundation Port Properties) •
Box) • 202 97
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Location Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog
Properties Dialog Box) • 204 Box) • 95
General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties
Dialog Box) • 207
General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog M
Box) • 211 Merge pipe runs • 152
General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Modify a sketched cross-section • 81
Dialog Box) • 216 Modify a straight segment in a path • 84
General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Modify a turn in a path • 85
Properties Dialog Box) • 219 Modify an Arc in a Path • 85
General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Modify cross-sectional properties for a
Dialog Box) • 222 volume • 128
General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Modify Slope Dialog Box • 162
Box) • 225 Modify the placement points of a volume •
General Tab (Pipeline System Properties 117
Dialog Box) • 203 Modify the volume size by dragging • 117
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) Move a branch • 168
• 86 Move a component • 187
General Tab (Space Folder Properties Move a feature break • 193
Dialog Box) • 127 Move a pipe end • 169
General Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Move a pipe run • 168
Box) • 120 Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet • 169
Move a split • 193
H Move a straight pipe • 169
Move a turn • 170
Holes Tab (Foundation Port Properties) • 98 Move a volume to a new location • 118
Move Segments of a Path • 83
I Moving Pipe Features • 165
Insert a component • 183
Insert a component while routing • 183 N
Insert a feature break • 192 New Pipe Run Dialog Box • 154
Insert a piping specialty item • 184 Notes Tab • 198
Insert a surface mounted component • 184 Nozzle Properties Dialog Box • 91
Insert a takedown joint • 192
Insert a welded split • 191
Insert an instrument • 184

228 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide


Index

O Place a volume by two points using


PinPoint • 110
Occurrence Tab • 199
Place an elbolet • 186
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment
Place components while routing pipes • 147
Properties Dialog Box) • 56
Place Cylindrical Zone Command • 113
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties
Place Cylindrical Zone Ribbon • 114
Dialog Box) • 45
Place designed equipment • 54
Occurrence Tab (Foundation Port
Place Designed Equipment • 51
Properties) • 96
Place doors from the catalog • 43
Occurrence Tab (Nozzle Properties Dialog
Place Equipment • 39
Box) • 91
Place equipment from the catalog • 42
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape
Place Nozzle • 87
Properties Dialog Box) • 68
Place Prismatic Shape Ribbon • 72
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog
Place Shape • 63
Box) • 67
Place splits while routing pipes • 147
Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog
Place Volume by Four Points • 111
Box) • 226
Place Volume by Four Points Ribbon • 112
Organizing Space Objects • 101
Place Volume by Two Points • 106
Place Volume by Two Points Ribbon • 107
P Place windows from the catalog • 43
Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box • Preface • 9
202 Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box • 67
Permission Groups and Routing • 129 Properties Dialog Box • 119
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box • 204
Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog R
Box • 204
Reference Data Tab (Auto-Router Dialog
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box •
Box) • 29
207
Relationship Tab • 201
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box • 210
Remove a Pipe Run from the Table • 28
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box • 210
Remove Volume from Path Limit • 38
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box • 211
Reordering Volumes in a Path • 38
Pipe Runs Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) •
Results Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) • 30
22
Rotate a component • 188
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box •
Rotate a component on a nozzle • 188
216
Route a multi-sloped pipe run • 148
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box
Route a pipe run at specified distance • 149
• 219
Route a pipe run at specified distance and
Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box •
direction • 150
222
Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box •
location • 149
222
Route a pipe run with an offset • 150
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box • 225
Route a sloped pipe run • 148
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box •
Route Pipe • 133
203
Route pipe across P&ID off-page
Place a Cylindrical Zone • 114
connectors • 146
Place a foundation port • 89
Place a nozzle • 88
Place a nozzle from a P&ID • 89 S
Place a prismatic shape • 78 Save a Layout • 32
Place a shape • 65 Save Pipe Run Definitions • 28
Place a tee from a P&ID • 186 Save Routing Results • 31
Place a volume by four points • 112 Select component settings • 186
Place a volume by two points • 109

SmartPlant Layout User's Guide 229


Index

Select Insulation Material Dialog Box • 49,


60
Select Nozzle Dialog Box • 94
Select Pipe Run Dialog Box • 162
Select pipe run settings • 153
Select Space Folder Dialog Box • 104
Select System Dialog Box • 108, 163
Selecting Objects • 20
Set Offset Reference Dialog Box • 160
Set positioning relationships for designed
equipment • 54
Set positioning relationships for equipment •
42
Settings Tab (Auto-Router Dialog Box) • 33
Shape Properties Dialog Box • 67
Shape Tab (Volume Properties Dialog Box)
• 125
Sketch Properties Dialog Box • 86
Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic
shape • 79
SmartPlant Layout • 15
SmartPlant Layout Common Tasks • 18
Space Folder Properties Dialog Box • 127
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System
Properties Dialog Box) • 203
Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box • 161
Spool Properties Dialog Box • 226

T
Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 197

U
Understanding SmartPlant Layout • 17

W
What's New in SmartPlant Layout • 12

230 SmartPlant Layout User's Guide

Anda mungkin juga menyukai